Home

8904A

image

Contents

1. o 3B 2 Expanded Capabilities for Option 001 eee ee ee ee ee ee 3C 1 Section 4 Performance Tests IGTOCUCTION pesca pd ad R ve E A a dt a oe lee 4 1 Equipment Required dida da ai a e de A we 4 1 Performance lest Record 5 io ad ds SAE A A e ee es we we eS 4 1 Calibration Cyle e sra ai el ER Se es Se oe AA EA ee ee 4 1 Basic Functional Checks ss wee a ic di E T a di Sees amp a DB 4 1 IMTrOQUCHON una da dd A ee eM ee SE dat ds da E 4 1 BOO Reduired ice ds NI A RS he i e ee 76T 4 1 Performance Test Record Bis Be a sd de e ir dl e Se oh ee 4 1 Calibration VEIG 4 2 i454 es amp br E E E RR E is es 4 1 Basic Functional Cheeks ssh a ri GOW E See ee A da E e dd A R RS 4 1 Performance Test 1 AC and DC Amplitude Accuracy 4 3 Performance Test 2 AC Amplitude Flatness 2 2 2 0 eee a a 4 4 Performance Test 3 Spectral Purity 2 2 0 ee ee ee ee 4 10 Performance Test 4 Phase Accuracy aaa eee eee ee ee ee eee 4 14 Performance Test 5 Channel to Channel Phase Accuracy Option 001 4 17 Performance Test 6 Output 1 to Output 2 Phase Accuracy Option 002 4 20 Performance Test 7 Tone Sequence Timing Accuracy Option 001 4 22 Performance Test 8 DT MF Sequence Timing Accuracy Option 001 4 26 Performance Test 9 Digital Sequence Period Accuracy Option 0
2. East and West Europe Saudi Arabia Egypt unpolarized in many nations 8120 1689 8120 1692 Mint Gray Mint Gray 9 9 7 8 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 7 125V 8120 1378 STR STR NEMA5 15P Jade Gray United States 8120 1521 STR 90 Jade Gray Canada Mexico Phillipines Taiwan 8120 1751 STR STR Jade Gray U S Canada Same plug as above 8120 4754 STR 90 Dark Gray Japan only 250V 8120 2104 3 STR STR SEV1011 79 Gray Switzerland 1959 24507 8120 2296 4 STR 90 Gray 8120 3997 4 STR 90 177 Gray 250V 8120 0698 STR STR NEMA6 15P Black United States Canada 250V 8120 2956 3 90 STR 7 Gray Denmark 8120 2957 4 90 90 8120 3997 4 STR STR 250V 8120 4211 7 STR STR IEC83 B1 79 Black South Africa India 8120 4600 8 STR 90 79 Gray 8120 1860 STR STR CEE22 V1 59 Jade Gray II Systems Cabinet Use 8120 1575 0 STR STR 31 Jade Gray 8120 2191 8 STR 90 59 Jade Gray 8120 4379 8 90 90 80 Jade Gray Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for complete cable including plug E Earth Ground L Line N Neutral STR Straight 2 3 Installation Model 8904A HP IB Address Selection The Multifunction Synthesizer is both a listener and a talker Any address from 00 to 30 decimal can be used however address 21 should no
3. 11 ms Figure 4 10 DTMF Burst Waveform with Slight Negative Slewing 4 42 Performance Test 13 Model 8904A Performance Tests Performance Test 14 DIGITAL SEQUENCE PERIOD ACCURACY OPTION 001 Digital Sequence Option 001 Specification Period Duration 0 1 to 655 35 ms Period Accuracy 20 us Description A repetitive squarewave with an on time of 100 ys and an off time of 900 ys is set up on an oscilloscope The on time period is measured directly NOTE For instruments with Option 006 balanced output digital sequences are not useable and are not specified Equipment OSCIIGSCODE ada ais HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Procedure 1 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the high impedance ac coupled oscilloscope s input 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in NEXT NEXT fi Digital Sequence NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF f1 Seq Base Hex ft Seq Base Bin f2 On Lev 1V NEXT f4 Edit Sequence 1000000000 f2 Seq End 10 ENTER NEXT f2 Continuous 3 Adjust the oscilloscope s vertical gain sweep speed and triggering to view the 100 us pulse of the waveform from the Multifunction Synthesizer The on period should be between 80 and 120 us The observed pulse width jitter should be included as part of the on period error On Period 80_________ 120 us Performance Test 14 4 43 Model 8904A Hewlett
4. 25 ns for valid results Model 8904A Operation 3 5 DIGITAL PORT General Information The Digital Port on the back of your HP 8904A allows external and internal signals to be used for various signaling needs If your instrument is equipped with Option 003 this port allows you to select Hop Ram addresses to fast hop frequency phase and amplitude settings For more information on hopping refer to the previous information in this section on Option 003 Ch C Ch B Polarity Polarity Ch A Ch D Ch C ch a Polarity cha Ch D Zero Zero Zero Zero Polarity Crossing Crossing Crossing Crossing A 3 2 O O O 7 6 5 4 1 O O O O O O O O O Oo O 15 14 13 12 11 10 39 a ae a e Trigger Trigger 0 1 2 3 Circuit Out In V Gnd Seq Mode Hop Register Address High True Figure 3 6 Digital Port Connections Connector Functions Zero Crossing Outputs These are TTL signals that identify when the associated channel s waveform is crossing the 0 volts point in its waveform 0 and 180 This output pulses high for approximately 600 ns each time the zero crossing occurs These outputs are available with all instrument configurations regardless of what options are present in your instrument NOTE Changing the Phase setting of the signal to be output alters the phase relationship between the signal and its corresponding zero crossing signal Zero crossings are only exactly aligned with the signal being output when the Phase
5. Test Description AC AMPLITUDE FLATNESS EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Output 1 Frequency Range 20 Hz to 100 kHz 100 to 600 kHz 2 increments 20 increments Output 2 Option 002 Frequency Range 20 Hz to 100 kHz 100 to 600 kHz 2 increments 20 increments AC AMPLITUDE ACCURACY AND FLATNESS OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 AC Amplitude Accuracy Frequency and Amplitude Settings 30 Hz 10 V 100 Hz 10 V 1 kHz 10 V 10 kHz 10 V 20 kHz 10 V 100 kHz 10 V 30 Hz 1 V 100 Hz 1 V 1 kHz 1 V 10 kHz 1 V 20 kHz 1 V 100 kHz 1 V 30 Hz 0 1 V 100 Hz 0 1 V 1 kHz 0 1 V 10 kHz 0 1 V 20 kHz 0 1 V 100 kHz 0 1 V AC Amplitude Flatness Frequency Setting 30 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 4 47 Performance Tests Model 8904A Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 4 of 7 Test g Test Description SPECTRAL PURITY EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Output 1 Frequency and Amplitude Settings 20 Hz 10V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 10V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 10V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 10V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 20 Hz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW Output 2 Option 002 Frequency and Amplitude Settings 20 Hz 10V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 10V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 10V 80 kHz
6. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 EXAMPLE PROGRAM OF STATUS BYTE USE FOR HP 8904A DIM Error 250 Select_code 7 Hpib_address 726 Mask 67 OUTPUT Hpib_address SM Mask l ON INTR 7 GOTO Service_request ENABLE INTR Select_code 2 OUTPUT Hpib_address APE 1 VU 160 Service_request 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 Status_byte SPOLL Hpib_address SELECT Status_byte CASE 65 Errors HP IB Programming Error CASE 66 Errors Timebase Out Of Lock CASE ELSE Errors END SELECT PRINT Error END Operation HP IB address of HP 8904A User defined mask value Send mask to HP 8904A this mask allows SRQ timebase out of lock 4 HPIB errors When SRQ goto service routine Enable computer SRQ interrupt HPIB programming error to demonstrate an SRQ response Routine to check status byte Get status byte Determine error type Select_code 7 indicates HP IB as the source The 2 is this computer s code that tells it to allow on SRQ interrupt Figure 3 13 Sample Program for Using Status Byte Information 3 33 TT TTT Operation Model 8904A 3 8 ERROR CODES AND HELP MESSAGES 3 34 When the HP 8904A detects an inappropriate operating condition such as when an inactive key is pressed it beeps to let you know that a message about the condition is available on the Help display The HP 8904A s Help display
7. Example APH2 123VL Enter Hop Mode amplitude parameter Valid terminators are VL MV and UV Form AHR lt ON or OF gt Example AHROF Amplitude Hop On Off Control Form DPE lt ON or OF gt Example DPEOF Digital Port On Off Control gt E FRH Form FRH lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRH723 5HZ Enter Hop Mode frequency parameter Valid terminators are HZ and KZ FHR Form FHR lt ON or OF gt Example FHROF Frequency Hop On Off Control HRA Form HRA lt 1 or 2 Digit Address gt ET Example HRA9ET Enter Hop Register address Addresses 0 15 are valid valid terminator is ET PHH Form PHH lt Phase Value gt lt Terminator gt Example PHH59 3DG Enter Hop Mode phase Valid terminators are DG and RD PHR Form PHR lt ON or OF gt Example PHROF Phase Hop On Off Control Form QRE Example OHE The Port Status value is the sum of four states Port Status DPE value FHR value PHR value AHR value Bit Weight DPE value On 16 Off 0 FHR value On 8 Off 0 PHR value On 4 Off 0 AHR value On 2 Off 0 Operation 3 29 Operation 3 30 RRAERERRHERERRERARAREREEEEREERERRERARRRAREREREREREEREEREEREERREREREE HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language R programming example for the S HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER S OPTION 003 fast hop L 1 A ERR ARRACA CREARA RHERAARRERERRARARARAAERRARERARA RARE R
8. AC Amplitude Accuracy Output 1 Frequency Setting 0 1 Hz 0 08 div 0 08 div 1 kHz 0 08 div 0 08 div 100 kHz 0 08 div 0 08 div 600 kHz 0 24 div 0 24 div DC Amplitude Accuracy Output 2 Amplitude Setting 10V 9 794 Vdc 10 21 Vde 5 01 V 4 907 Vdc 9 115 Vdc 5V 4 897 Vdc 5 105 Vdc 2 5 V 2 449 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 25 V 1 224 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 625 mV 604 mVdc 646 mVdc 312 mv 291 mVdc 333 mVdc 156 2 mV 135 2 mVdc 177 2 mVde 78 1 mV 57 1 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 39 0 mV 18 0 mVdc 60 0 mVdc 19 5 mV 1 5 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 10 0 mV 11 0 mVdc 31 0 mVdc 10 V 10 21 Vdc 9 794 Vdc 5 01 V 5 115 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 5 V 5 105 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 5 V 2 553 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 25 V 1 276 Vdc 1 244 Vdc 625 mV 646 mVdc 604 mVdc 312 mV 333 mVdc 291 mVdc 156 2 mV 177 2 mVdc 135 2 mVdc 78 1 mV 99 1 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 39 0 mV 60 0 mVdc 18 0 mVdc 19 5 mV 40 5 mVdc 1 5 mVdc 10 0 mV 31 0 mVdc 11 0 mVdc AC Amplitude Accuracy Output 2 Frequency Setting 0 1 Hz 0 08 div 0 08 div 1 kHz 0 08 div 0 08 div 100 kHz 0 08 div 0 08 div 600 kHz 0 24 div 0 24 div 4 46 Model 8904A Performance Tests Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 3 of 7 ooo Results No
9. APESHUL DEMS FE 150 OUTPUT A FRRBE S 3HZ 40 RESET gt 166 OUTPUT Ro SF RUwKS 20 Spee 176 OUTPUT A GRP lla 5 OV E ee re OP A a eae ee 136 NEXT 1 om FOR 1 0 TO 15 130 DUTPUT A OPE ONFHEGHAHRIUNS Se AS HRACEVRLS TD BE OUTER A E Pee DUTPUT A SHANA CET lt 19 Alar LORO DONE Pe COFRE A E TRIT pe ech STUF 5 10 Hop the Output Signal Things to You have now completed the procedures for setting up Hop Mode operation The following outline lists the key steps for setting up Remember your HP 8904A to hop Channel A s frequency amplitude and phase About Hop settings Mode Operation 1 Enter the desired parameters into each Hop Register 0 through 15 2 Specify which of Channel A s settings you wish to hop 3 Select the Hop Registers by entering each Hop Register address via the front panel keys or the rear panel DIGITAL PORT Figure 5 4 provides an overview of the HP 8904A s Hop Mode capabilities CHANNEL A DIGITAL PORT REAR PANEL OUTPUT 1 Figure 5 4 Simplified Block Diagram of the Hop Mode Configuration Hop the Output Signal 5 11 Key Points About Operation Table 5 3 Configure Channel A Output Signal Operating Considerations for Hop Mode Operation Table 5 2 contains operating considerations you should keep in mind as you configure your HP 8904A for Hop Mode operation e Only Channel A s parameters can be hopped If your HP 8904A is
10. o HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER 50 Ie OPTION 001 fm stereo composite o 60 left channel only 6 70 T T TE E E EE EEE E EEE 80 30 OUTPUT 726 PS GMQ Preset amp go to channel 10 configuration mode 110 128 OUTPUT 726 DEAOC1 FRA39KZ APAIVL PHA2700D6 WFASI 1 Set channel A to 130 Destination Output I 149 1 Freq 39 kHz Amplitude 150 il volt Phase 270 degrees 160 Waveform Sine 170 180 OUTPUT 726 DEBOC1 FRB37KZ APBIVL PHBS DG WFBSI Set channel B to 190 Destination Output 1 200 Freg 37 kHz mplitude 10 1 volt Phase 90 degrees 220 Waveform Sine 230 240 OUTPUT 726 DECOCi FRCiSKZ APC 100MU WFCSI Set channel C to 250 Destination Output 1 1 260 Freq 19 kHz Amplitude i 270 volt Waveform Sine 280 290 OUTPUT 726 DEDOC1 FRDIKZ APD2UL WFDSI Set channel D to 300 Destination Output 1 310 Freq kHz Amplitude 320 2 volts Waveform Sine 330 END Figure C 2 Sample Program for Configuring Channels A B C and D C 8 HP IB Codes 10 AAA AAA ARANA AA 20 gt HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language 30 x programming example for the 40 HP 89 4A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER 59 x OPTION t digital sequence 60 l AAA AAA ARA AAA RA 70 80 OUTPUT 726 PS GM4 Preset amp go to digital 90 sequence mode 109 110 OUTPUT 726 BSB SBP 5MS DAPHSUL DAPLO 2UL Set sequence base to
11. 0 2 4 dB 30Hz to 200 kHz Output Impedance Nominally 6000 THD N including spurs amplitude 140 m Vrms to 1 V rms into a balanced 6000 load Typically 50 dB 0 32 30 Hz to 300 Hz 30 kHz BW 3C HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements Expanded Capabilities for Option 001 Hop RAM Sequencing General Description Detailed Operation This document is a supplement to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide and the Operation and Calibration Manual It contains operation and reference information specific to HP 8904As with Option 001 and with serial prefix 2948A or above The HP 8904A Option 001 capabilities have been expanded to include two new operating modes Hop RAM Sequencing and FM Stereo These functions are described in detail in separate sections of this supplement The information provided includes the following topics e General Description e Detailed Operation e HP IB Operation LZ He p an Press NEXT LAST Hop RAM Sequence mode is a combination of the Digital Sequence mode of Option 001 and the Hop RAM mode of Option 003 Unlike the Option 003 Hop RAM function that requires an external timing signal Hop RAM Sequence mode uses an adjustable internal timing signal To enable the Hop RAM Sequence mode from the Main Selection Level press the NEXT key until f3 HOP RAM Sequence is displayed Press the f3 key to access the first level Hop RAM
12. 097 ewer re te NOTE This concludes the test if the instrument does not have Option 002 DC Amplitude Accuracy Output 2 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF WAVE FORM 7 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output and the digital multimeter input both to the oscilloscope s de coupled high impedance vertical input using a tee Refer to Figure 4 1 8 Switch the digital multimeter to measure dc volts On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the de amplitude as listed in the following table For each setting the amplitude as read on the digital multimeter should be within the limits shown NOTE If the measurements are slightly out of limits performing Adjustment 1 Output Gain and Offset may bring the instrument within specifications rev 01JUL91 Performance Test 2 d Performance Tests Model 8904A Voltage Reading Limits hom te Amplitude Setting 10 V 9 794 Vdc 10 21 Vdc 5 01 V 4 907 Vdc 5 115 Vdc 5 V 4 897 Vdc 5 105 Vdc 2 5 V 2 449 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 25 V 1 224 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 625 mV 604 mVdc 646 mVdc 312 mv 291 mVdc 333 mVdc 156 2 mV 135 2 mVdc 177 2 mVdc 78 1 mV 57 1 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 39 0 mV 18 0 mVde 60 0 mVdc 19 5 mV 1 5 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 10 0 mV 11 0 mVdc 31 0 mVdc 10 V 10 21 Vdc 9 7
13. 100 to 120 Vac 10 at 48 to 440 Hz or 220 to 240 Vac 410 at 48 to 66 Hz Power consumption is 80 VA maximum If you need further information about the power requirements for your instrument refer to the HP 8904A Operation and Calibration Manual This is a Safety Class I product 1 e provided with a protective earth terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the Mains power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation Turn On Instrument If you are operating this instrument in extreme environmental conditions refer to the HP 8904A Operation and Calibration Manual for specific operating limitations Help Messages Interpreting the When the HP 8904A detects an inappropriate operating condition such as when an inactive key is pressed it beeps to let you know Help M essages that a message about the condition is available on the Help display The HP 8904A s Help display is accessed by pressing the blue SHIFT key and then the HELP key Table C 1 lists the Error Number for each Help Message displayed by the HP 8904A along with a brief description of the operating conditions that will cause the HP 8904A to display the message There is no new message A key was selected without specify
14. 5 Switch the voltmeter to measure de volts on a 10 mV range Read and record the voltage The voltage should be about 3 7 mVdc 1 kHz Reference ________mVdc 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in FREQ 550 kHz Adjust A3L11 or A10L11 for the same reading as in step 5 Allow several seconds for the level reading to stabilize 5 12 Adjustment 5 Model 8904A Adjustments Adjustment 6 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING AND CONTRAST Description The instrument s display is adjusted for most pleasing backlighting and character contrast Any setting of the two adjustments is permissible however brightest backlighting may reduce the display s lifetime somewhat which is why the backlighting was designed to time out 3 minutes after the last key is pressed Procedure 1 Remove the instrument s top cover The cover may be tightly secured in the groove of the bottom cover If the top cover does not pull off easily after backing out the screw on the rear edge back out the screw on the rear edge of the bottom cover also Place the instrument as it will normally be used for example in a rack or sitting on a table with its tilt stands down 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer if the display backlighting is not on press LOCAL Adjust A2R36 80V for the most pleasing backlighting intensity If the backlighting times out and goes off press LOCAL again Refer to the Component Locator Figure 5 5 3 Adjust A2R32 DISPLAY CONTRAST for
15. A data terminator specifies the units of the data entered i e Hz Degrees Volts Seconds Percent etc the ENTER command is also included in this group Help Messages B 3 SR em A A A A AA A AA A A A Table B 1 Error Numbers and Description Listings for the HP 8904A s Help Messages 3 of 4 A Data Terminator was received via HP IB when none was expected Refer to Error 46 for an expanation of data terminators A combination of errors 41 through 47 probably exists Confirm that at least one of these errors exists and correct it Enter the data again and read any error messages that result an error number other than 48 should be displayed The second error message should help to further isolate the error until it is eliminated Signal Sequence Mode Errors Time value entered is out of range On and Off Time values cannot both be zero Amplitude value entered is out of range Frequency value entered is out of range Tone Number entered is out of range Only tone numbers 0 F Hexadecimal are valid Sequence Index value entered is out of range Valid Range is 1 250 Sequence End value entered is out of range Valid Range is 1 250 The number entered is not valid in the Sequence Base selected Either the Binary Octal or Hexadecimal base numbering system is used to specify the Sequence Index and Sequence End For example you may not use the character 9 when you have previously specified the Octal base sinc
16. Channel Config 1 7 Channel Configuration Mode 1 7 Chassis ground 1 16 control 1 6 Option 02 4 2 Configuration Options 1 2 1 23 Option 01 2 1 3 1 Option 01 with 02 block diagram 4 12 Option 02 4 1 Option 03 5 1 copy parameters 3 18 deg 1 11 destination 2 7 2 20 Help Messages B 3 DESTN 2 17 DIGITAL PORT 5 8 Digital Sequence 3 14 Digital Sequence Mode HP IB Codes C 4 sample HP IB program C 8 specifications 3 18 ranges 2 21 DTMF 3 10 DTMF Sequence 3 10 DTMF Sequence Mode HP IB Codes C 4 specifications 3 18 Dual Output Ports 4 1 HP IB Codes C 9 Edit Sequence 3 7 END 3 7 Error Numbers B 1 Exit 1 21 Fast Hop 5 8 Float Control 1 6 Floating ground 1 16 1 21 cable connections 1 17 LEDs 1 12 voltage differential 1 17 FM Stereo Composite Signal 2 22 FM ranges 2 21 Four Channel Operation 2 1 block diagram 2 19 channel combinations 2 20 destination 2 20 HP IB Codes C 4 modulation 2 20 sample HP IB program C 7 Save Register 2 20 summation 2 20 with Option 02 4 12 FREQ 1 8 Freq Hop 5 6 frequency ranges 1 8 front panel 1 12 ground 1 16 index 2 T Era HELP B 1 Help Messages B 1 Hop Mode Operation 5 1 5 3 5 10 Hop Mode address selection 5 9 DIGITAL PORT 5 8 Fast Hop 5 8 HP IB 5 11 HP IB Codes C 10 sample HP IB program 5 11 C 11 Hop Register 5 5 HP IB Codes C 1 Option 01 C 4 Option 02 C 9 Option 03 C 10 HP IB Digital Sequence Mode sam
17. DSB or Pulse In the following demonstration you will configure Channel C to pulse modulate Channel A at the same time that Channel B is amplitude modulating Channel A If you have just completed the preceding demonstration How to Modulate Channel A your HP 8904A is correctly configured for beginning this demonstration proceed to step 1 on the next page If your HP 8904A is not configured as shown in Table 2 1 please configure Channels A and B as shown in the table before you begin this demonstration Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 11 Add Another 1 Press the NEXT key as needed to access the Channel C Modulation Mode Configuration display oo E 2 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and then the PULSE key O O You have now configured Channels B and C to simultaneously A AM and pulse modulate Channel A ee T You can simultaneously modulate Channel A with up to three different modulation signals by simply configuring Channel D to also modulate Channel A Figure 2 3 illustrates the simultaneous modulation possibilities provided by your HP 8904A CHANNEL B OUTPUT 1 Figure 2 3 The Various Simultaneous Modulation Possibilities 2 12 Modulate or Sum the Signals Now Vary the Phase With the HP 8904A you can precisely control the phase of each modulation signal 3 Press the PHASE key ee i 4 Press the INCR SET key and enter 45 degrees The HP 8904A eee en allows you to advance the phase
18. NREYD 18 Press the T Hop Fam Har softkey and then the 7 key Continue to press the key until you reach Hop Register 3 Notice the frequency and amplitude of the signal displayed on the oscilloscope hop to the values specified in the selected Hop Register each time the 7 or D keys are pressed 19 Now press the 2 key and then the ENTER key You can also select the Hop Registers directly in whatever order you wish 20 Press the LAST key until the Channel A Configuration display appears The HP 8904A display informs you that the frequency and amplitude settings for Channel A are now being set by the Hop Registers et eee Hop Kann ABP TO Hop Kant y H LA PHASE 8 8 des FORM Sine DESTH Duti Note Although Channel A s phase setting was not hopped in this demonstration it can also be configured to hop using the procedures described in this demonstration for hopping the frequency and amplitude settings 5 8 Hop the Output Signal How to Fast The HP 8904A allows you to fast hop between the parameters you have entered at switching speeds of up to 8 us using the rear panel Hop Channel A DIGITAL PORT The DIGITAL PORT De he naa cs the Hop Register address selection lines The selection address for each register Hop Ram Adrs is shown on the Hop Configuration display The registers can be selected in whatever order you desire The following steps describe how to use the DIGITAL PORT for fast hopping Channel A 1 Pres
19. Synthesizer that the amplitude does not inadvertently exceed 1 Vrms a displayed setting of 2 8 V on the Multifunction Synthesizer Performance Test 3 Model 8904A Performance Tests HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER DIGITAL MULTIMETER OUTPUTS THERMAL 1 HIGH CONVERTER AC INPUT DC OUTPUT Figure 4 2 AC Amplitude Flatness Performance Test Setup Procedure Output 1 NOTE If the instrument has an Option 002 and 006 combination skip to step 7 1 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in SHIFT SPECIAL NEXT f2 Status ON NEXT NEXT NEXT f2 Status ON f4 Exit f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF AMPTD 2 V INCR SET 2 mV 2 Connect the ac input of the thermal converter to the Multifunction Synthesizers OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output Connect the dc output of the thermal converter to the input of the voltmeter Refer to Figure 4 2 3 Switch the voltmeter to measure dc volts on a 10 mV range Read the voltage and record it for future reference The voltage should be about 3 7 mVdc for the HP 11050A Thermal Converter 1 kHz Reference _________ mVde Performance Test 3 4 11 Performance Tests Model 8904A NOTE Perform step 4 quickly to minimize the effect of thermal drift on the thermal converter Check the level at 1 kHz before setting the next frequency if drift is suspected 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the frequency as indicated in the
20. Using an Oscilloscope Equipment Multifunction Synthesizer Reference 0 cc cece cee cece eee eee tac aeeens HP 8904A Time Interval CONDE ace ctice recanted has eee ee ae aie Loe E EE HP 5370B Procedure Output 1 NOTE If the instrument has an Option 002 and 006 combination skip to step 5 1 Set up the equipment as follows Refer to Figure 4 4 a Connect the test Multifunction Synthesizer s rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT to the reference multifunction synthesizer s 10 MHz reference input This slaves the two synthesizers to a common reference 4 26 Performance Test 8 Model 8904A Performance Tests HP 8904A REFERENCE MULTIFUNCTION MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER TIME INTERVAL SYNTHESIZER COUNTER 10 MHz REF OUT OUTPUTS OUTPUT 1 HIGH Figure 4 4 Phase Accuracy Performance Test Setup b Connect the test Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the start input of the time interval counter c Connect the reference multifunction synthesizer s output to the stop input of the counter 2 On both Multifunction Synthesizers press SHIFT PRESET After the instruments preset key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 5 V 3 Set the time interval counter as follows Input settings apply to both the start and stop inputs Set the measurement function to time interval ao p Set the statistics function to mean and clear the reference c Set t
21. You can also turn off the HP 8904A s output path to completely remove the output signal from the Output Port Figure 1 5 shows the HP 8904A s Output Port LEDs These LEDs inform you of the current configuration status of each Output Port THESE LEDs LET YOU KNOW WHETHER OUTPUT PORTS 1 AND 2 ARE CONFIGURED FOR FLOATING GROUND LED ON OR CHASSIS GROUND LED OFF THE HP IB LEDs LET YOU KNOW THE CURRENT STATUS OF THE HP 8904A S REMOTE OPERATING CAPABILITIES THESE LEDs LET YOU KNOW WHETHER OUTPUT PORTS 1 AND 2 ARE TURNED ON LED ON OR TURNED OFF LED OFF Figure 1 5 The Front Panel LEDs Inform You of the HP 8904A s Current Output and HP IB Operating Status Meet the HP 8904A 1 13 Turn Off the Output 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the OUTPUT key The Output ae Se ee Control display should now appear on the HP 8904A Lad L Z ce tin 2 t 11T F ee b D eee Miner 2 Press the 1 key This designates which Output 1 or 2 you wish to control Output 2 can be turned On only when the HP 8904A is equipped with Dual Output Ports Option 02 3 Press the OFF key You have turned off Output 1 Note that the ON LED for OUTPUT 1 is no longer lit and that the output signal no longer appears on the oscilloscope display You have disconnected the output signal from the Output Port The HP 8904A maintains a constant 50 ohm impedance at its output whether the output is on or off gt
22. press PHASE then press the ft or D keys a few times to locate the null of the 100 kHz signal The null should occur between 178 0 and 182 0 deg At 100 kHz 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 178 0 ________ 182 0 deg 4 36 Performance Test 11 Model 8904A Performance Tests Performance Test 12 TONE SEQUENCE TIMING ACCURACY OPTION 001 Specification Tone Sequence Option 001 On time Duration 0 0 8 to 655 35 ms except 0 off time and 0 on time Off time Duration 0 0 8 to 655 35 ms except 0 off time and 0 on time Timing Accuracy 20 us Description A repetitive tone burst sequence of five 1 kHz cycles is set up and observed on an oscilloscope By incrementing the duration of the burst the on time the nominal 5 ms on time is made to exactly synchronize with the end of the fifth cycle of the burst The total on time incrementing equals the on time error The burst s off time is measured by setting the off time equal to the previously measured on time nominally 5 ms and observing the waveform on an audio spectrum analyzer The analyzer will display a 1 kHz carrier with 100 Hz sidebands The off time is incremented until the second sideband of the 1 kHz carrier is suppressed The total off time incrementing equals the off time error NOTE For instruments with Option 006 balanced output even though the tone sequences appear at Output 1 tone sequence timing
23. 0 2 of setting Pulse modulation level accuracy Typically 5 up to 20 kHz pulse rate DSBSC carrier suppression Typically gt 72 dB Intermodulation two equal signal summed into one output Typically lt 70 dBc for frequencies up to 100 kHz lt 60 dBc for frequencies 100 to 600 kHz Specifications for level accuracy modulation accuracy and spectral purity are all referenced to the peak of the composite signal less 3 dB When signals are summed the specification for each individual signal is degraded by its amplitude relative to the peak of the composite signal FM Stereo Mode with Option 001 Test signal modes Left Right Left Right Left only and Right only Test tone frequency range 20 Hz to 15 kHz Composite signal level up to 10 V__ into 509 Pilot tone level 0 to 100 of composite level Pilot tone level resolution 0 1 of composite level Pilot tone frequency range 0 1 Hz to 600 kHz default frequency 19 kHz Pilot tone phase adjustment range 0 0 to 359 9 Subcarrier frequency range 0 1 Hz to 600 kHz default frequency 38 kHz Preemphasis 25 psec 50 usec and 75 usec Supplemental Characteristics FM stereo multiplex separation L R typically gt 65 dB audio frequency 20 Hz to 15 kHz M S typically gt 70 dB audio frequency 20 Hz to 15 kHz Multiplex subcarrier suppression typically gt 70 dB ee x lt Tone Sequence with Option 001 Number of different frequen
24. Channel A signal should now appear on the oscilloscope display Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 5 Set Up the Modulation Signal Note Note 3 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel B Configuration display Only Channel A can be modulated However any or all of the remaining channels B C and D can be used for modulating Channel A 4 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the DESTN key The HP 8904A is now ready for you to specify how you want to use Channel B 5 Press the AM key to configure Channel B to amplitude modulate Channel A Note that when you specified the destination the HP 8904A changed the amplitude entry field in the display to the appropriate units for the destination you have chosen AM 6 Press the AMPTD key and enter 90 The amplitude modulated sinewave should now appear on your oscilloscope display Adjust the oscilloscope s triggering if necessary to get a stable display That s how easy it is to set up a modulated output signal using the HP 8904A If the output signal no longer appears on the oscilloscope and you pressed the DSB key press the LAST key now to return to the Channel A display and re enter 2 5V for the amplitude Then press the NEXT key to return to the Channel B display The DSB key selects Dual Sideband Suppressed Carrier AM The operation of this modulation mode and the effect it has on Channel A are described later in this demonstration 2 6 Modulate or
25. For purposes of timing consider 0 1 V at A2TP1 to be the threshold of a logical high For the other test points consider 1 3 Vdc to be the threshold of a logical high c Connect test point A2T P5 to channel B of the dc coupled oscilloscope using a divider probe 3 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in SHIFT SPECIAL 7 ENTER f2 Status ON LAST f2 Status ON f4 Adjusting A2R105 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer adjust potentiometer A2R105 for a high period of 45 ns on the 13 MHz clock synchronization signal displayed on channel B of the oscilloscope Adjusting A2S2 5 Connect channel B of the oscilloscope to A2TP2 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer toggle the switches on array A2S2 one at a time until the positive going edge of channel B lines up with every other positive going edge of channel A The frequency of channel B is one half the frequency of A NOTE When setting the delay switches only one switch in an array should be closed at a time therefore when changing switch settings open the currently closed switch before closing the desired switch Set the switches to the settings that give the result nearest the desired value Adjusting A2S4 7 Move the probe of channel B to test point A2TP5 Note the time delay between the positive going edges of the signals on channel A and channel B Delay Between Signals at A2T P1 and A2TP5 _________ns 8 Subtract
26. HP 8904A diagram shows the PRESET key location Each time the SHIFT PRESET keys are pressed the HP 8904A briefly displays its Preset display This display lists the Configuration Options that your HP 8904A has been equipped with For example the Preset display shown below indicates that all three Configuration Options 01 02 and 03 are present Note which options if any are listed in the Preset display on your instrument HP 8904A Opts 01 02 07 Firmware Revision 11111A Serial Ho Geel Once you have determined which options your HP 8904A is equipped with refer to Table 1 1 for an overview of the capabilities provided by your instrument s configuration Meet the HP 8904A 1 3 a A A A A RR Table 1 1 The Operating Capabilities Provided by the Configuration Options e A single Output Port that can be e configured for floating or chassis ground connections e Four internal synthesized signal sources each capable of generating any one of six waveforms Modulation e internal modulation using up to three modulation signals Summation e internal signal summation of up to four signals Three Signal Sequence Modes e Sequential transmission of analog or digital signals for simulating communications signaling Two Channels e Two internal synthesized signal sources each capable of generating any one of the six waveforms Two Output Ports e Dual Output Ports that can each be configured for floating or chassis gr
27. Hz to 50 kHz up 600 kHz for DSBSC Summation with Option 001 Two three or four channels may be summed into a single output Two or three channels may be summed for modula tion of channel A All combinations of channels are accept able EXCEPT FOR A C and B D or A D and B C at the same time Channel to channel phase accuracy equal amplitude sine wave signals summed into one output 0 1 or 30 ns 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz whichever is greater F carrier lt 600 kHz Mathematically Derived Characteristics AM accuracy the higher of 0 024 AM or 0 20 of setting up to 20 kHz modulation rate and 100 kHz carrier 1 to 99 depth FM accuracy the higher of 0 1 Hz or 0 28 of setting up to 20 kHz modulation rate 20 kHz deviation and where Ee KAT lt 100 kHz M accuracy the higher of 0 1 or 0 28 of setting up to 20 kHz modulation rate where o Fmod Dev 2 20 kHz and 573 o r 4 Emos X DEV L 600 kHz 57 3 DSBSC peak envelope accuracy Same as amplitude accuracy up to 20 kHz modulation rate Phase accuracy when one channel is used to modulate channel A sine wave 0 15 or 30 ns whichever is greater 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz carrier frequency 1 4 Supplemental Characteristics VOR bearing accuracy Typically 0 05 AM accuracy at a 1 kHz rate and 600 kHz carrier Typically lt 0 2 FM accuracy at a 1 kHz rate 20 kHz deviation and 600 kHz carrier Typically lt
28. Low Pass Filter is adjusted so that three stopband notches are centered at three specific frequencies If the notches for this elliptic function filter are set correctly then the filter s flatness in the passband and its rejection throughout the stopband should be adequate The adjustment is made to the A3 or A10 Output Assembly If the instrument has only one Output Assembly A3 the adjustments are made only to it If the instrument has Option 002 with two Output Assemblies A3 and A10 adjustments are made to one or both assemblies Accessing A3 will require extra disassembly If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output adjustments are made on the A3 assembly with the balance transformer disconnected Equipment Network Analyzes d beet oo ei rs HP 3577A NOTE A spectrum analyzer with a tracking generator that covers 0 to 5 MHz is also suitable HP 8984A NETWORK MULTIFUNCTION ANALYZER SYNTHESIZER Figure 5 1 Sharp Cutoff Filter Adjustment Test Setup Procedure 1 Turn the Multifunction Synthesizer s LINE to OFF and unplug the power cord It can remain unplugged throughout the test Remove the instrument s bottom cover 2 If the instrument has Option 002 a second output assembly and Output 1 the output from the A3 Output Assembly is to be adjusted move the A10 Output Assembly out of the way Refer to the disassembly procedure in Figure 5 4 3 If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output disconnect
29. Off Time 10 ms NEXT f2 Seq End 1 ENTER NEXT Performance Test 13 4 41 Performance Tests Model 8904A AMPTD 1 V f2 Continuous NEXT NEXT f2 On Time 3 Adjust the oscilloscope s vertical gain and sweep speed to view the 1 kHz output burst from the Multifunction Synthesizer The waveform should appear similar to the one shown in Figure 4 10 NOTE The waveform shown was triggered on a negative g0ing zero crossing If the oscilloscope is difficult to trigger try adjusting the sweep time so that only one tone burst shows Sweep time is not critical Also try normal triggering as opposed to automatic triggering If fewer than fourteen zero crossings of the burst show the display is still valid unless the waveform is unstable 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press the f or U keys until the negative going zero crossing of the last cycle of the tone burst touches OV with no positive or negative slewing Slewing refers to the rapid change in voltage which appears as a vertical line on the oscilloscope The On Time setting which appears on the Multifunction Synthesizer s display should be between 4 27 and 6 27 ms On Time Timing 4 27 _________6 27 ms Off Time Accuracy 5 On the oscilloscope adjust the sweep time and position so that the time between the first and second burst the off time can be measured The off time should be between 9 and 11 ms Off Time Timing 9
30. Output Assembly is to be adjusted move the A10 Output Assembly out of the way Refer to the disassembly procedure in Figure 5 4 3 If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output disconnect the coax cable from A3J400 OUTPUT HIGH at the front edge of the A3 assembly In the steps that follows when a reference is made to the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH connector make the connection to A3J400 instead Maximum AC 4 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output for the A3 Output Assembly or OUTPUTS 2 HIGH for the A10 Output Assembly to the voltmeter input Switch LINE to ON 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in For A3 Output Assembly For A10 Output Assembly f1 Channel Config f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF FREQ 1 kHz FREQ 1 kHz AMPTD 10 V AMPTD 10 V 6 Set the voltmeter to measure ac volts Adjust A3R224 or A10R224 DAC LEVEL for a level between 7 06 and 7 07 Vac Refer to the Component Locator Figure 5 6 5 4 Adjustment 1 Model 89044 Adjustments Audio Amplifier Offset 7 Connect the voltmeter probes to A3TP4 or A10TP4 output of Audio Amplifier and to A3TP8 or A10T P8 ground Set the voltmeter to measure de volts 8 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in For A3 Output Assembly For A10 Output Assembly WAVE FORM z WAVE FORM AMPTD 0 V AMPTD 0 V 9 On the Multifunction Synthesizer adjust A3R229 or A1
31. Selection Level menu 5 Access the Channel Configuration Mode for all instruments and make the following Channel A settings e FREQ 1000 0 Hz e AMPTD 1 000 V e PHASE 0 0 deg e DSTN Outil e WFORM settings Master controller Sine N Slave 1 Sq Tu Slave 2 Trngl N 3A 6 HP 8904A Option 005 6 Connect the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH signal from each instrument to the inputs of a multi channel oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope to trigger on the signal from the Master controller Set the time division at 0 1 ms 7 Center each waveform on the oscilloscope s display so that the tops and bottoms of each waveform are at the same level 8 Using the SAVE RECALL function SAVE the instrument settings for both of the Slave instruments and then turn the power off 9 Turn both Slave instruments back on and recall the saved settings At this point the zero crossings of the three signals should not align 10 Press SHIFT 6 RESET on the Master controller The zero crossings of all three signals should align as shown in the illustration below HP 8904A Outputs 1 MASTER signal N gt O 2 SLAVE 1 signal EN gt O 3 SLAVE 2 signal ar gt O If the zero crossings of the signals are not aligned verify that you have properly enabled special functions 6 and 7 Also check for the proper Master Slave instrument connections HP 8904A Option 005 3A 7 A A E A A HEE T aran ST HP IB Operation Remote
32. Sum the Signals AAA A A A A A A A A a Sa a A eee a ee ee e Now Look at the Possibilities A A a Ks E area v Ep Ty A bags A A ararac CE E ie a pilaa gias aE AAD nA Change the Modulation Waveform 7 Press the WAVEFORM key and then the 4 ramp N triangle TU square and NOISE keys to see each of the other waveforms available for the modulation signal Adjust the oscilloscope s triggering if necessary to get a stable display AT LAA al ARANA ARANA IHHL at WIT T Raa dd 111111111117 paa RNT EA Ramp LR TEDI O HE EE E E HTH IOMA DA 11T ITH sah dh ih dh ah 8 Press the sine key Change the Modulation Mode 9 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and the DSB key You have selected Double Sideband Suppressed Carrier AM The HP 8904A provides you with five modulation modes to choose from AM FM M DSB and Pulse Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 7 a A A A A A A 5 RR A A OT Remember The HP 8904A always changes the amplitude setting to 140 V when the destination is changed so remember to always specify your destination choice first then enter the amplitude setting 10 Press the AMPTD key and enter 3V Note that DSB modulation suppresses the carrier signal Channel A 2 8 Modulate or Sum the Signals Se A A A A A A A A AA U A A A A A A E Change the Carrier Waveform 11 Press the LAST key to return to the Channel A Configuration display Notice t
33. accuracy is not specified Equipment Audio Spectrum Analyzer AAA HP 3561A or HP 3580A Osc lOsCOne Ta ia kenge hen Sere hag nk A HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Procedure On Time Accuracy 1 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the high impedance ac coupled oscilloscope s input and to the non floating input of the audio spectrum analyzer using a tee Refer to Figure 4 7 Performance Test 12 4 37 Performance Tests Model 8904A HP 8904A RF SPECTRUM MULTIFUNCTION ANALYZER OSCILLOSCOPE SYNTHESIZER OUTPUTS 1 HIGH Figure 4 7 Tone Sequence Timing Accuracy Performance Test Setup 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in NEXT f1 Tone Sequence NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 1 kHz f2 On Time B ms INCR SET 01 ms f4 Off Time 10 ms INCR SET 01 ms NEXT f2 Seq End 1 ENTER NEXT AMPTD 1 V f2 Continuous NEXT NEXT f2 On Time 3 Adjust the oscilloscope s vertical gain and sweep speed to view the 1 kHz output burst from the Multifunction Synthesizer The waveform should appear similar to the one shown in Figure 4 8 NOTE The waveform shown was triggered on a negative going zero crossing If the oscilloscope is difficult to trigger try adjusting the sweep time so that only one tone burst shows Sweep time is not critical Also try normal triggering as opposed to automatic triggering If fewer than
34. and to avoid damage to the equipment CAUTION This instrument contains components that are highly susceptible to damage from static discharge Always observe proper ESD safety procedures while making any measurements or touching any part of the inside of the instrument Most adjustments described in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument and with protective covers removed Maintenance should be performed only by service trained personnel who are aware of the hazard involved for example fire and electrical shock Where maintenance can be performed without power applied the power should be removed Removal of the Multifunction Synthesizer s top and bottom covers is necessary to perform these adjustments The exposed power supply contains circuitry operating at a potential of 160 Vac Be very careful to not rest your hands tools or anything else against any part of the power supply Immediately below the top of the rear frame rail are the line power socket fuse holder and line voltage select switch If the instrument must be moved while being adjusted be careful not to let your fingers touch the terminals on any of these parts while moving Adjustments Model 8904A A pin to pin voltage difference of 32 Vde may be found on many of the Multifunction Synthesizer s circuit board connectors Be careful while working on the circuit boards with power supplied to the instrument The ba
35. beginning Write the first 250 characters into the sequence string in hexadecimal format Move sequence pointer to accept next 250 Write next 250 Move sequence pointer to accept last 250 Write last 250 Set sequence hop frequency to 600 Hz trigger sequence in burst mode HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements 3C 7 FM Stereo Composite Generator General Description The FM Stereo Composite Generator function transforms the HP 8904A into a dedicated FM stereo encoder allowing you to test commercial FM broadcast stereo receivers All of the associated parameters are adjustable to offer the widest possible range of testing Detailed Operation To enable the FM Stereo mode from the Main Selection Level press the NEXT key until 1 FM Stereo is displayed Press the f1 key to access the first level FM Stereo Composite Generator menu Use the NEXT and LAST keys to access the other FM Stereo menus You can return the instrument to the Main Selection Level at any time by pressing the SHIFT MAIN keys Second Menu Tone Frequency This tone simulates the audio frequency information being broadcast Change the frequency by pressing the FREQ key and entering the desired frequency 20 Hz to 15 kHz f3 Mode Press the f3 key to change the stereo mode The following modes are available e Off eR L e R L e R only e L only 3C 8 HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements Composite Amplitude Change the compo
36. by pressing f2 ON Only one of the instruments may be set to be the Master controller Use the same key sequence f2 ON to enable this function Press f4 to return to the Main Selection Level menu You can now make whatever signal and output settings you need on each of the connected instruments Once all instrument settings have been made press the SHIFT d RESET keys on the Master controller to synchronize all of the connected instruments Whenever the frequency or destination of any channel on a Slave instrument is changed or if it is turned off and on a 6 RESET must be performed by the Master controller to re synchronize all channels An Example of Phase Synchronization The following operation example uses three HP 8904As equipped with Option 005 It utilizes one output per instrument to provide three separate phase synchronized signals If you are not familiar with the Channel Configuration operations needed to output a signal refer to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide for detailed operating instructions 1 Connect the necessary power splitters and cables use figure 3 1 as a guide 2 Turn all the instruments on and enable special function 6 Enable synchronous mode This is required for the Master controller and all Slave instruments 3 To set up the Master controller enable special function 7 Configure as MASTER controller 4 Return all instruments back to the Main
37. channel A to Destination Output 1 Freq 39 kHz Amplitude 1 volt Phase 270 degrees Waveform Sine Set channel B to Destination Output 1 Freq 37 kHz Amplitude 1 voit Phase 90 degrees Waveform Sine Set channel C to Destination Output 1 Freq 19 kHz Amplitude 0 1 volt Waveform Sine Set channel D to Destination Output 1 Freq 1 kHz Amplitude 2 volts Waveform Sine Figure 3 9 Sample Program for Configuring Channels A B C and D 1 RRARHKARRERRAHKRERRARRARREREEARERRERREKRRERRERRERAERRAREEEEREEERARERR HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language N programming example for the R t HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER 1 OPTION 001 digital sequence x i PHATRARRRERHERRAKRAHEARRERRARKRAAEEERAREREREREREREREERARRERERRREEKEKEN OUTPUT 726 PS GM4 OUTPUT 726 BSB SBPO 5MS DAPH5VL DAPLO 2VL OUTPUT 726 SEQP1ET WSQ000100110111 SEQE12ET OUTPUT 726 RUNC END Preset and go to digital sequence mode Set sequence base to Binary sequence period 0 5 ms on level 5 volts and off level 0 2 volt Set sequence pointer 1 write sequence 000100110111 and set sequence end 12 l Run sequence continuously Figure 3 10 Sample Program for Configuring a Digital Sequence String 3 27 Operation Destination 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 1
38. eee 10 Press the PHASE key and the INCR SET key on the HP 8904A a ae Notice that the HP 8904A has placed an is in its display next to FHH E This is to let you know that the value now being displayed is the increment set value rather than the current phase setting 11 Press 45 and the deg key to enter an increment step size of 45 degrees 12 Now press the 7 key Notice that the displayed waveform shifts each time the phase of Channel A is incremented This is due to the resulting change in Channel A s phase relationship with the line voltage signal that is being used to trigger the oscilloscope 13 Press the 0 key and the deg key to return the HP 8904A s phase setting to 0 0 degrees 14 Set the oscilloscope to trigger on Channel A again rather than the line voltage The HP 8904A allows you to vary the phase of its sine square triangle or ramp waveforms from 0 to 359 9 degrees in 0 1 degree steps That s how easy the HP 8904A makes it for you to create any of its six waveforms at the frequency amplitude and phase setting that you desire Figure 1 4 Precise 45 Phase Shift of the HP 8904A 1 12 Meet the HP 8904A How to Control With the HP 8904A you can choose either a chassis ground or a floating ground circuit configuration The floating ground the Ou tpu t Port configuration allows you to reference the HP 8904A s ground to the ground level of the input device that the HP 8904A is connected to
39. five cycles of the burst show the display is still valid unless the waveform is unstable 4 38 Performance Test 12 Model 8904A Performance Tests Figure 4 8 Tone Burst Waveform with Slight Negative Slewing 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press the T or 2 keys until the negative going zero crossing of the last cycle of the tone burst touches 0V with no positive or negative slewing Slewing refers to the rapid change in voltage which appears as a vertical line on the oscilloscope The On Time setting which appears on the Multifunction Synthesizer s display should be between 4 98 and 5 02 ms On Time Timing 498 ________ 5 02 ms Off Time Accuracy 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press f4 Off Time key in the number recorded in step 4 then press ms The off time should equal the on time as shown on the Multifunction Synthesizer s display and should be approximately 5 ms 6 Adjust the spectrum analyzer to observe the 1 kHz tone burst and its 100 Hz sidebands Refer to Figure 4 9 7 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press the 1 or O keys until the second upper sideband of the 1 kHz carrier is nulled The Off Time setting which appears on the Multifunction Synthesizer s display should be within 0 01 ms of the On Time setting Off Time Timing Difference 0 01_________0 01 ms Performance Test 12 4 39 Performance Tests Model 8904A RANGE 1 dBV SUPPRESSED 1200 Hz SIDEBAND
40. following table For each setting perform the following steps a On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 2 V again b Note the de voltage on the voltmeter c On the Multifunction Synthesizer press the Y or Y keys as needed to bring the dc voltage to the level noted in step 3 Keep track of the number of increments required to do this Consider each upward increment as positive and each downward increment as negative NOTE The Multifunction Synthesizer s display usually will not show the amplitude with the resolution needed to see the effect of the amplitude incrementing This is why it is important to keep track of the total number of increments Number of Increments 20 100 1 000 10 000 50 000 100 000 200 000 600 000 5 For frequencies of 20 Hz to 100 kHz in the table of step 4 compute the largest difference in number of increments The absolute value of this difference should be 2 increments or less Flatness from 20 Hz to 100 kHz _________ 2 increments 6 For frequencies of 100 to 600 kHz in the table of step 4 compute the largest difference in number of increments The absolute value of this difference should be 20 increments or less Flatness from 100 to 600 kHz __________ 20 increments NOTE If the measurements are slightly out of limits especially between 100 and 600 kHz performing Adjustment 3 Sharp Cutoff Low Pass Filter and Adjustment 4 Sine X X Compensation may bring the instrument wit
41. including spurs amplitude 140 mVrms to 1 Vrms into a balanced 6009 load lt 50 dB 0 32 30 Hz to 300 Hz 30 kHz BW 1 5 General Information Model 8904A Table 1 1 HP 8904A Specifications 4 of 4 General Store recall 35 nonvolatile Output type Floating or grounded HP IB programmable Maximum float voltage signal float 10V peak maximum from high or low side to chassis ground Zero crossing outputs available in Channel Config mode only For each channel a TTL compatible zero crossing output and polarity output are provided The zero crossing output pulses high for approximately 600 ns each time the channel phase goes through 0 or 180 The polarity output is high for phases of 0 to 180 low for 180 to 360 These outputs do not reflect any user specified phase offsets External timebase input 10 MHz accepted at a nominal level of 0 1 to 5V peak automatic switching Timebase output Output level gt 0 dBm 0 3V peak into a 502 load Output signal will be the internal timebase unless an external timebase is connected to the external timebase input When an external timebase is connected it will be routed to the timebase output connector Temperature Operating 0 C to 50 C Storage 20 C to 70 C Humidity range 95 RH 0 C to 40 C Remote operation HP IB All functions except the line switch are remotely controllable HP IB compatibility SH1 AH1 T6 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PP
42. instrument should be checked using the following performance tests at least once each year 4 5 BASIC FUNCTIONAL CHECKS The basic functions of the HP 8904A can be verified by performing the instrument operating demonstrations in Chapter 1 all instruments and Chapter 4 instruments with Option 002 in the HP 8904A Basic Operation and Application guide and comparing the output signals with the waveforms shown in the guide Table 4 1 lists the functions that can be verified using the Basic Operation and Application guide For Options 005 and 006 refer to the respective Operating Supplement Performance Tests Model 8904A Table 4 1 Basic Functional Checks Reference in Basic Operation and Application Guide Functions and Operations Verified Power up Self check Presence of options User interface Keyboard Display Beeper Signal parameters Waveform Frequency Amplitude Phase Output conditioning Float and ground Filter On and off Store and recall Select special functions Second output Opt 002 Complex signal operations Modulation Opt 001 Summation Opt 001 Chapter 4 4 2 Model 8904A Performance Tests Performance Test 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY Specification The frequency of the internal 10 MHz time base is measured directly with a counter Frequency Internal 10 MHz Time Base Accuracy Description Equipment Prequency Counter ua A aia a HP 5
43. is accessed by pressing the blue SHIFT key and then the HELP key The following table lists the Error Number for each Help Message displayed by the HP 8904A along with a brief description of the operating conditions that will cause the HP 8904A to display the message Table 3 9 Error Numbers and Description Listings for the HP 8904A s Help Messages 1 of 3 Description There is no new message A key was selected without specifying what the data was related to The key selected does not correspond to the function selected invalid HP IB address entry Only 00 30 decimal are valid entries The or Y key cannot be used with this function A key on the front panel is stuck This is normally found at power up Refer to the HP8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem The instrument cannot access the output board that connects to the OUTPUTS 1 connector Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem A hardware error was detected by the power up checks Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem The reference loop of the Digital Synthesis A2 assembly is out of lock Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem The Special Function display can only be accessed from the Main Selection Level A reverse power error was detected on an output board Disconnect the affected output from any external equipment and re enter the key sequence that originally resulted in the error If an error
44. is still detected by the instrument a reverse power problem still exists The recalled Save Register does not contain a SAVE setting The selected function cannot be performed in the present mode For example the FREQ function cannot be executed directly from the Main Selection Level An invalid Special Function number was entered Only Special Functions 0 15 decimal may be entered The Special Function number input was too large for the instrument to recognize it as data This condition occurs when the data input is greater than 65535 Refer to Error Message 17 concerning the range of Special Functions available The number entered was too large for the function selected Increment Set is not available with the function selected An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist There are no set table modes or functions at this instrument level For example in Hop Mode Operation the Hop Parameter display lists only four keys that will perform a function in this mode f1 f2 f3 and 14 Any other key such as AMPTD has no meaning in this mode and will result in this error Channel Configuration Errors Instrument is not configured for destination control rev O1JULGI Model 8904A Operation Table 3 9 Error Numbers and Description Listings for the HP 8904A s Help Messages 2 of 3 Description Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 1B Errors HP 1B numeric input error Exponent too large or i
45. it as data This condition occurs when the data input is greater than 65535 Refer to Error Message 17 concerning the range of Special Functions available 19 The number entered was too large for the function selected 20 Increment Set is not available with the function selected 22 An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist 24 There are no setable modes or functions at this instrument level For example in Hop Mode Operation the Hop Parameter display lists only four keys that will perform a function in this mode f1 f2 f3 and f4 Any other key such as AMPTD has no meaning in this mode and will result in this error Channe Configuration Errors 31 instrument is not configured for destination control Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB Errors 41 HP IB numeric input error Exponent too large or improper number format 42 HP IB numeric input error The number was too large or too small or a negative value was received when a positive value was required 43 A number value was sent via HP IB when one was not expected 44 Invalid unique data was input via HP IB Unique data specifies the Waveform Modulation Type Modulation On Off Control and Filter Selection when entering a data string via HP IB 45 Unique data was received via HP IB when none was expected Refer to Error 44 for an explanation of unique data 46 An invalid terminator for the present data type was received via HP IB
46. may be used as a digital modulator Examples of signals which can be generated with this technique include FSK or multilevel FM up to 16 levels BPSK QPSK and QAM Supplemental Characteristics Switching Speed Via digital port Typically lt 8 us lt 20 us for full filter settling Via HP IB Typically lt 8 ms Maximum switching rate via digital control port approximately 400 kHz Maximum allowable address skew via digital port 25 ns for valid results rev 01NOV89 OPTION 005 SPECIFICATIONS 500 outputs only Unit to unit phase accuracy Additional 30 nsec error 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Total phase error between units is then the greater of 0 1 degree or 60 nsec 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Maximum number of synchronized units 8 units using low loss power splitters for a total of 16 phase related outputs if all units have Option 002 Recommended power splitters lt 4 units synchronized Mini Circuits model ZSC 4 3 or equivalent lt 8 units synchronized Mini Circuits model ZFSC 8 1 or equivalent Supplemental Characteristics Unit to unit phase accuracy typically lt 15 nsec additional error 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Total typical phase error between units is then the greater of 0 1 degree or 30 nsec 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz OPTION 006 SPECIFICATIONS Sine wave only All specifications for the standard 502 HP 8904A are degraded by the accuracy flatness and distortion specifications of the Option 006 6000 transformer
47. menu Use the NEXT and LAST keys to access the other Hop RAM menus You can return the instrument to the Main Selection Level at any time by pressing the SHIFT MAIN keys 3C 2 HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements Ass A E O O Defining the Hop RAM Address Settings 0 0 Hz Y a Deg f1 Hop RAM Address Hop RAM addresses are used to store frequency phase and amplitude settings These settings can then be arranged as a sequence to create the desired signal To select a Hop RAM address press the f1 key and then enter the desired address number The f4 keys can also be used to select the Hop RAM address after the f1 key is pressed Frequency Phase and Amplitude Settings These parameters are entered by pressing the associated SIGNAL key and entering the numeric value and terminator Specifying the Output and Editing Formats Z Burst Length i x WORM a1 ine f1 Seq Edit Base The sequence edit base determines the number system hexadecimal octal or binary used when displaying and editing the sequence Press f1 to select the edit function and then press it again to alter the edit base f2 Seq Output Base The sequence output base determines how the sequence data will be interpreted The two number systems available are hexadecimal and binary In the hexadecimal mode each number in the sequence corresponds to one of the 16 Hop RAM addresses All 16 addresses of the Hop RAM can be used limiting the maximum sequen
48. or Sum the Signals 2 3 AA AA el 7 Continue pressing the NEXT key to step through the Configuration displays for Channels B C and D These are the four channels provided by Option 01 Figure 2 1 shows how to access the four channels 8 Continue to press the NEXT key until you have returned to the Channel A Configuration display If you have an instrument that is equiped with Hop Mode Option 03 the two Hop Mode displays will appear following the Channel D display as you press the NEXT key Chapter 5 contains information to help you learn about Hop Mode operation HF S3H4H Main Selection Level L Config TL Channel Configuration Mode ess HESTYLAST keys 4 Exit 1480 Hz AMPTO 146 pu FRENO 1066 6 Hz AMPTO ch ch D FREG 1496 6 Hz AMFTO PHASE HOW deg WORM Sine CESTH ote Figure 2 1 All Four Channels Can Be Accessed After You Have Pressed the f1 Channel Config Softkey 2 4 Modulate or Sum the Signals How to Modulate The HP 8904A offers you a wide selection of modulation Ch JA possibilities In this demonstration you will discover that you can anne create many useful signals by simply modulating Channel A with one other channel Set Up the Carrier 1 Press the FREQ key and enter 20 kHz as the Channel A frequency Note If you enter a wrong digit simply press the key to backspace and then re enter the correct digit 2 Press the AMPTD key and enter 2 5V The 20 kHz 2 5 Vpk
49. other reference information is given under the following headings Instrument Block Diagram provides an overview of the main functional blocks that comprise the HP 8904A How to Create and Output a Signal illustrates how the different signal controls are implemented in the instrument and the control sequences used to create and output a signal Instrument Functions and Operating Considerations describes the capabilities and operating considerations for a standard HP 8904A and the various options Digital Port identifies the connections for this port and describes how it is used for operations such as fast hopping Option 003 equipped instruments Remote Operation lists the HP IB codes and capabilities implemented in the HP 8904A Programming examples are given to illustrate the usage of some of the codes listed for each option Status Byte discusses the purpose and use of the Status Byte Programming examples are given to help you further understand and apply the information Error Codes and Help Messages lists the various error codes and their meanings Special Functions describes the special functions in the HP 8904A and how to program them Operating Technical Reference provides detailed technical descriptions for a variety of topics related to operating the HP 8904A Menu Map illustrates the organization of the various menus used in the HP 8904A and what keystrokes are used to access each of the menus This fold o
50. output level for signals being summed is 10V into an open circuit Refer to the Operating Considerations Summation information immediately proceeding the Abbreviated Specifications for additional information Sequencing Table 3 3 Option 001 Sequencing Capabilities Sequence Signal Tone Single Frequency 16 different user defined frequencies DTMF Dual Tone 16 standard DTMF eat Multi Frequency tone pairs 0 9 A D Digital Binary Octal or 16 0 F Hex 250 4 bit words Hexadecimal codes Mill 1000 bits Output Serially Single Freq Tones 750 4 bit words Maximum Sequence Length Number of Different Signals Hexadecimal Octal 3000 bits or Binary Codes rev 01NOV89 3 11 Operation Model 8904A Option 002 A Second Channel and Output NOTE The following description pertains to instruments with Option 002 only Addition of Option 001 provides more flexibility for using the second channel and output Channel B and Output 2 Are Added The second channel and output added by Option 002 are identical in function and operation to the standard single channel and output included with all instruments The Frequency Amplitude Phase and Waveform of channel B are controlled separately from channel A allowing you to output two completely different signals at once The Outputs for the two channels are also independently controlled The phase relationship between the two channels is pr
51. signals using the HP 8904A s front panel keys 13 Press the LAST key twice to return to the DTMF Configuration display Z On Time 44 00ms 14 Press the f3 anual Oil softkey You have configured the HP 8904A s front panel DATA keys to emulate a telephone key pad 15 Press any one of the DATA keys 0 through 9 A through D or or to output the corresponding DTMF signal for 44 ms at 2 Vpk If you wish to hear the DTMF signals Figure 3 6 shows a connection diagram for connecting an external speaker to Output 1 Figure 3 6 Connection Diagram for Connecting an External Speaker to Output 1 To use the Manual Dial function you must first specify an output amplitude in the Run Mode display as described in this demonstration in order for the DTMF signals to be gt 140 uV at the output 3 14 Output a Sequence of Signals How to Output a Digital Sequence Enter the Bit Parameters In this demonstration you will output a binary Digital Sequence of TTL compatible bits 1 If you are not currently at the Main Selection Level display press the blue SHIFT key and the MAIN key 2 Press the NEXT key twice and then the fibiaital Se7querce softkey to access the Digital Sequence Mode HP 836 648 Main Selection Level ofi Channel Config MAIN oim aT Sequence Mode Ea NEXTLAST keys 4 Exit 18 ms L 9069080196100011 7 f3 Period 1 Seq Base Hex fi Seq Index p ed Manua
52. the coax cable from A3J400 OUTPUT HIGH at the front edge of the A3 assembly In the steps that follows when a reference is made to the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH connector make the connection to A3J400 instead 5 8 Adjustment 4 l Model 8904A Adjustments 4 Move jumpers A3J3 or A10J3 and A3J7 or A10J7 to the opposite pins that is so that the jumper plug shorts the center pin and the opposite outer pin of the circuit board jack Refer to the Component Locator Figure 5 6 5 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 5 1 The network analyzer connects to two SMC connectors on A3 or A10 The network analyzer should be set up to drive the Sharp Cutoff Low Pass Filter at A3J5 or A10J5 with its source and to measure the output from the filter at A3J6 or A10J6 6 Set the network analyzer as follows a Set the frequency to sweep linearly from 0 to 5 MHz b Set the vertical scale to log Set the source level to 10 dBm G o Set the input attenuation and scale so that the passband of the displayed filter response is at the top of the display and the notch at approximately 1 MHz is not obscured by noise Refer to Figure 5 2 7 Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 Hz 8 Set the network analyzer s center frequency and frequency span as indicated in the following table For each setting adjust the indicated inductor so that the stopband notch is centered about the center frequency Network Analyzer Settings Center Frequency MHz Fr
53. the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired state Float Control Form FR lt Channel gt lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRA20K2Z Set frequency of channel Valid terminators for frequency are HZ and KZ D Frequency Tt T aa 3 20 Model 8904A Operation Table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 2 of 5 HP IB Code Go To Mode E increment Set Output Control Description Form GM lt Mode Number gt Example GM4 Go to Mode Go to Mode accepts the values 0 9 0 Channel Configuration Mode 1 Reserved for future options 2 Tone Sequence Mode 3 DTMF Sequence Mode 4 Digital Sequence Mode 5 9 Reserved for future options This function will return a three digit ASCII string representing the Error Number 000 to 255 where 0 means no error reported Refer to Appendix B for the list of Help Messages Read the ID message A read of the ID string sends 80 characters to the requesting controller in the following format HP8904A Opts 01 02 03 Firmware Revision XXXXXa Serial No XXXXX Form lt Parameter gt IS lt Value gt Example APAIS1VL Increment set Used for any parameter that can be modified by the Up and Down commands Increment Down Examples PHAUP UPDNDN DN UP and DN can be used for settings which have an associated increment set value They can b
54. the most pleasing character contrast that is the intensity of the characters to the background Make the adjustment with the backlighting as it will normally be used rev 0O1JULYI Adjustment 6 5 13 Adjustments Model 8904A Adjustment 7 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTION 005 9 14 Description When two or more Multifunction Synthesizers are chained together in a master slave arrangement the synchronization between the slave and master clock and slave and master phase reset outputs is critical Errors in timing contribute directly to the unit to unit phase error The slave and master delays are adjusted to the same nominal value to bring the phase error within specification Delay adjustments are made in discrete steps by setting switches The duty cycle of the clock is adjusted by a potentiometer NOTE This adjustment has no effect on instruments without Option 005 If the instrument has Option 005 this adjustment should be made only when there is strong reason to suspect a synchronization problem between Multifunction Synthesizers The nature of the adjustment and lack of circuit diagrams make it difficult to understand what is happening The factory settings should remain valid for the life of the instrument even when the A2 Controller Assembly has been repaired or replaced due to a fault elsewhere on the assembly If a synchronization problem is suspected run Performance Test 11 Unit to Unit Phase Accuracy Jf the test fails ch
55. the proper phase relationships between channels will be maintained The phase reset brings all the channels into phase alignment but in doing 3 42 Model 8904A Operation so causes a glitch Any phase offsets have specific meaning when the frequencies of the four channels are harmonically related If the channels are at non harmonically related frequencies the phase reset will cause all the channels to reset to zero phase or the specified phase offset if any From that point the channels will each continue on accumulating phase at their own rate If phase continuous frequency switching is desired special function 1 can be activated This special function will disable the automatic phase reset so that frequency switches will be phase continuous Activating this special will however result in operation where the specified phase relationships of the four channels will not be valid To overcome this the user can perform a manual phase reset to realign the channels from the front panel by pressing the blue shift key and the the f3 softkey Amplitude switches in the Channel Configuration Mode are also not phase continuous When the amplitude is changed the output will be blanked for approximately 13 ms This is done so that amplitude glitches resulting from changing analog attenuators will not be allowed to reach the device under test There are two methods of achieving glitch free amplitude switches with the HP 8904A The first method is to use
56. then the FLOAT key 3 Press the 1 key and then the OFF key Note that the FLOAT annunciator LED for OUTPUT 1 is now off You have configured the HP 8904A s circuit ground to be referenced to chassis ground at OUTPUT 1 The chassis ground output configuration is used in this demonstration to minimize the set up requirements You will learn more about the HP 8904A s chassis and floating ground configurations later in this demonstration d Adjust the oscilloscope s trace to center scale on the display Meet the HP 8904A 1 7 How to Output You are now ready to learn how quickly and easily the HP 8904A 2 enables you to set up the output signals you desire a Signal y ds e dd a 1 Press the n Channel Contig softkey to enter the HP 8904A s Channel Configuration Mode Figure 1 1 shows how to access the Channel Configuration Mode 2 Press the NEXT key to advance the display ahead to the Channel A Configuration display xx O Channel Configuration Mode X Press NEAT LAST keys 4 Exit 24 ch Ar FREG 1000 90 Hz AMPTD 148 pY PHASE 0 0 dea MEORM Sine DESTN Quti Figure 1 1 Accessing the Channel Configuration Mode is as Simple as Pressing a Key 1 8 Meet the HP 8904A A A A A nan Enter a Frequency 3 Press the FREQ key to select the frequency entry field on the a display Notice that the parameter entry fields in the display and i eG the four SIGNAL keys below the display have been arr
57. when the unit is turned off When the instrument is turned back on the same settings are automatically selected This effectively provides a dedicated store recall register to eliminate the need to reenter the same settings Special 1 Disable Automatic Phase Reset When operating normally in the Channel Configuration mode the HP 8904A resets the relative phase of each channel to zero 0 whenever the frequency or destination of any channel is changed However any phase offset that has been specified is maintained All signals with a phase setting of zero 0 are reset to a zero crossing point in there respective waveforms regardless of the phase relationship that existed before the change occurred Enabling this special function prevents the phase reset from occurring As the frequency or destination of one channel is changed the phase of the other channel s is not disturbed Even when you do change the frequency of a channel the phase angle of that channel is not changed This allows for phase continuous operation of the HP 8904A This effect can be demonstrated by displaying a 0 5 Hz sinewave on an oscilloscope and then changing the frequency in 0 1 Hz increments When this special is off the phase resets to zero 0 when the frequency is changed when the special is on the phase does not change as the frequency is changed Special 2 Disable Beeper The beeper normally beeps twice when the instrument is powered up and then beeps o
58. while being modulated You can sum only one channel with a dc Waveform into an output board and one is already active The Sync Clock signal needed for phase synchronization is not present An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist The Tone Frequency only has a range of 20 Hz to 15 Hz The Pilot Level maximum in 100 3 36 rev 01NOV89 l Model 8904A Operation 3 9 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Introduction The special functions alter the instruments operating environment in order to change how the instrument responds to changes in different instrument settings or operating conditions These functions perform simple operations such as disabling the beeper and more complex functions such as disabling the automatic phase reset in the Digital Synthesis IC NOTE Special Functions can only be changed when the instrument is at the Main Selection Level Performing an instrument PRESET turns off all special functions Using the MAIN key does not effect specials Enabling and Disabling Special Functions From the Main Selection Level press the SPECIAL key Use the NEXT and LAST keys to scroll through the list of specials When the special you are changing is displayed press f2 and ON or OFF to enable or disable that function Exit the SPECIAL menu by pressing the f4 key Special 0 Last State Recalled on Power Up Enabling this function tells the instrument to remember the instrument settings that are present
59. 0 RARA ACC H T T A E L RRARRARARARRRA ARANA 70 73 OUTPUT 726 PS Preset HP 8904A 80 OUTPUT 726 GMO Goto channel configuration mode 90 OUTPUT 726 FC10F Turn output 1 float off 100 OUTPUT 726 FRA1000 1HZ l Set channel A frequency to 1000 1 Hz 110 OUTPUT 726 APA1 25VL Set channel A amplitude to 1 25 V 120 OUTPUT 726 PHA90DG Set channel A phase to 90 degrees 130 OUTPUT 726 WFARA Set channel A waveform to ramp 140 END Figure 3 8 Sample Program for Configuring Channel A 3 24 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A Operation Table 3 5 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used With Option 001 Instruments 1 of 2 HP IB a Code Description Four Channel Operation Destination Form DE lt Channel lt Destination gt Examples DEAOC1 DEAAM Set destination of channel Valid data values for destination are AM FM PM DS PU OC1 OC2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 and OF Modulation AM Amplitude Modulation valid AM terminators are or PC FM Frequency Modulation valid fm terminators are KZ or HZ PM Phase Modulation valid PM terminators are DG or RD DS DSB Modulation valid DSB terminators are VL MV and UV PU Pulse Modulation Signal Sequence Modes Amplitude Form APH lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt Example APH1 999VL Enter Tone or DTMF amplitude Amplitude terminators are VL MV and UV Digital Level DAPH Digital Sequence On Level DAPL Dig
60. 0 to 5 MHz input and Output Impedance 502 o 3 dB Bandwidth 1 MHz P A Sensitivity 5 mV per division Input Impedance 1 MN and 500 Triggering External and internal Two Channels A vs B Display Oscilloscope HP 3325A Option 001 Frequency Range 1 kHz to 1 MHZ Output Level 1 Vrms Output Impedance 500 Variable Phase Range 360 deg Variable Phase Resolution 0 1 deg Synthesized Signal Generator P Performance Tests A Adjustments rev 01NOV89 1 11 General Information Model 8904A Table 1 2 Recommended Test Equipment 2 of 2 instrument e S Type Critical Specifications Thermal Level Range 1V HP 110504 or Converter Frequency Range 20 Hz to 600 kHz Labs Flatness 0 03 1395A 1 Input Impedance 502 Multifunction All specifications must match the HP 8904A Opt 005 HP 8904A Synthesizer Option 005 Power Four way Mini Circuits Splitter impedance 50 Q ZSC 4 3 2 required Path Loss 1 dB Frequency Range gt 50 MHz P Performance Tests A Adjustments Used only to test HP 8904A Option 005 1 12 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A Installation Section 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides the information needed to install the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Included is information pertinent to initial inspection power requirements line voltage and fuse selection power cables HP IB address selection interconnection mating co
61. 00 0190000000 0000000 F6IN HUGE ee 910000000 0000000 omero OOI CL O O oo 00 OO OO 200000000000000 IEA bg 0000000000 000000000084 0000000000 A 00000600000 RA M 0000000000 Q G aL 00000000 200000000 eae 00000000 O 00000000 0 009000000 fA de 0000000000 s Jpeg 0000000000 O O 0 000006060000 L 00000000 oR o O C14 0000000 RRR L D se C51 o 0000000900 enol JE 9000000000 0 R noD IAS 0000000000 E FE 22090000000 0000000000 f E 0000000075 0000000000 gen O vo000000000 TREE 0000000000 ar oro ST etn w ogo ik 3 ofan 2000000 y dp 0000000 O 2000000 TE 0000000 ofE JO 0000009 LG A 0000000 sn 200000000 o000000 aal BE D 9 17 R36 BACKLIGHTING DOOGOOGGOGOOOOOOOOOOO O R32 DISPLAY CONTRAST omo Qa CSB o Figure 5 5A Adjustment Locations for A2 Serial Prefix 2942A and below Adjustments Model 8904A R105 DUTY CYCLE R32 DISPLAY CONTRAST TP4 TP1 Lo i l ee de Z woj 6r3 ean A es 159 cmo S _ez2 o o h E U tin BACKLIGHTING Fig
62. 00 kHz 10 deg 100 kHz 100 deg 26 4 ns 276 4 ns 2776 4 ns 10 kHz 1 deg 10 kHz 10 deg 10 kHz 100 deg 264 ns 2 764 ns 27 764 ns 292 ns 2 792 ns 27 792 ns 2 640 ns 27 640 ns 277 640 ns 2 920 ns 27 920 ns 277 920 ns 1 kHz 1 deg 1 kHz 10 deg 1 kHz 100 deg 100 Hz 1 deg 100 Hz 10 deg 100 Hz 100 deg 26 400 ns 276 400 ns 2 776 400 ns 29 200 ns 279 200 ns 2 779 200 ns Output 2 Option 002 Frequency and Phase Settings 29 2 ns 279 2 ns 2779 2 ns 26 4 ns 276 4 ns 2776 4 ns 100 kHz 1 deg 100 kHz 10 deg 100 kHz 100 deg 292 ns 2 792 ns 27 792 ns 264 ns 2 764 ns 27 764 ns 10 kHz 1 deg 10 kHz 10 deg 10 kHz 100 deg 2 920 ns 27 920 ns 277 920 ns 2 640 ns 27 640 ns 277 640 ns 1 kHz 1 deg 1 kHz 10 deg 1 kHz 100 deg 29 200 ns 279 200 ns 2 779 200 ns 26 400 ns 276 400 ns 2 776 400 ns 100 Hz 1 deg 100 Hz 10 deg 100 Hz 100 deg Model 8904A Performance Tests Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 7 of 7 iba Minimum Actual Maximum CHANNEL TO CHANNEL PHASE ACCURACY OPTION 001 Null at 10 kHz 179 9 deg 180 1 deg Null at 100 kHz 179 0 deg 181 0 deg OUTPUT 1 TO OUTPUT 2 PHASE ACCURACY OPTION 002 Null at 10 kHz 179 9 deg 180 1 deg Null at 100 kHz 179 0 deg 181 0 deg UNIT TO UNIT PHASE AC
63. 01 4 30 rev 01NOV89 Volume 1 Contents Model 8904A Section 5 Adjustments Introd ction ola is A e ei re era oda BEE 5 1 Safety Considerations ss BRC a Reh E iw Bw RA we A Sea BR A aed 5 1 Equipment Required gt si ea a e SS OR Rae a e o ds Ee N 5 2 Post Repair Tests Adjustments and Checks 2 000 eee ew eee eee eee ane 5 2 Adjustment 1 Output Gain and Offset 20 20 00 o o 5 4 Adjustment 2 Output Balance 0 0 0 00 cee eee eee ee ee ee eee 5 6 Adjustment 3 Output Gain Option 006 5 7 Adjustment 4 Sharp Cutoff Low Pass Filter 5 8 Adjustment 5 Sine X X Compensation 2 000 eee eee nee eee ee eee 5 11 Adjustment 6 Display Backlighting and Contrast 0 0000 cee e eee eeeae 5 13 Adjustment 7 Phase Synchronization Option 005 5 14 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A General Information Section 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 INTRODUCTION This manual contains information required to install operate test and adjust the Hewlett Packard Model 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer The HP 8904A will generally be referred to as the Multifunction Synthesizer throughout this manual This manual documents standard Multifunction Synthesizers and Multifunction Synthesizers supplied with four internal channels Option 001 a second output port Option 002 Hop Ram capabili
64. 04A configurations Tables C 2 through C 4 contain the commands that are unique to each of the Configuration Options 01 02 and 03 A sample program is presented after each table to demonstrate the use of the codes Table C 1 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 1 of 4 Amplitude AP Form AP lt Channel gt lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt Example APA1VL Set amplitude of a channel Valid terminators for amplitude are VL MV and UV Backlight BO Backlight On Backlight Off Exit Form EM Exit Mode Exit Mode needs no data Filter Form FS lt Output Number gt lt Filter gt Example FS1AU Output Board Filter Select Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired filter SH Eliptic Sharp Cutoff LO Gaussian Low Overshoot AU Auto Automatic Float Control FC Form FC lt Output Number gt lt ON or OF gt Example FC1ON Float Output On Off Control Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired state Frequency Form FR lt Channel gt lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRA20KZ Set frequency of channel Valid terminators for frequency are HZ and KZ C 2 HP IB Codes Table C 1 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 2 of 4 Form GM lt Mode Number gt Example GM Go to Mode Go to Mo
65. 04A provides 0 1 degree phase increments If your HP 8904A is equiped with Option 02 only you have completed the operating demonstrations provided in this guide for your instrument The following demonstration beginning on the next page is for instruments that are also equiped with four channels Option 01 4 8 Output Two Signals at Once How to Modulate If your HP 8904A also has four channels Option 01 you can use the additional channels C and D to modulate or sum with the two and Sum output signals In this demonstration you will configure the HP 8904A to modulate Channel A using Channel B and output the modulated signal at Output Port 1 You will then sum Channels C and D and output the resulting signal at Output Port 2 Note This demonstration assumes that the parameters for Channels A and B are configured as described in the previous demonstration How to Output a Signal at Each Port If they are not please configure the Channels as shown in Table 4 3 before you begin this demonstration Table 4 3 Instrument irc for Channels A and B Output Two Signals at Once 4 9 A A A A A A AA AA A ne Ee Modulate at Channel A Output Port 1 1 Press the LAST key as needed to access the Channel A Configuration display 2 Enter a frequency of 20 kHz Channel B 3 Press the NEXT key the PHASE key and enter 0 degrees for Channel B 4 Press the WAVEFORM key and the key O 5 Press the blue SHIFT ke
66. 0R229 DC OFFSET1 for a level between 0 5 and 0 5 mVdc Output Amplifier Offset 10 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output for the A3 Output Assembly or OUTPUTS 2 HIGH for the A10 Output Assembly to the voltmeter input 11 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 40 mV 12 Adjust A3R418 or A10R418 DC OFFSET for a level between 40 1 and 39 9 mVdc Maximum DC 13 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 10 V 14 On the Multifunction Synthesizer adjust A3R224 or A10R224 DAC LEVEL for a level between 9 99 and 10 01 Vdc 15 Perform Adjustment 2 Adjustment 1 5 5 Adjustments Model 8904A Adjustment 2 OUTPUT BALANCE 5 6 Description This adjustment minimizes the signal on the low output of the Floating Output Amplifier on the A3 or A10 Output Assemblies If the instrument has only one Output Assembly A3 the adjustments are made only to it If the instrument has Option 002 with two Output Assemblies A3 and A10 adjustments are made to one or both assemblies Accessing A3 will require extra disassembly If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output adjustments are made on the A3 assembly with the balance transformer disconnected The instrument is set to produce a 10 Vpk sine wave at 100 kHz into the amplifier The 48 dB Attenuator following the amplifier is set to 48 dB so that the amplifier drives a 50 load The unbalanced signal is monitored by an oscilloscope at t
67. 1 DC1 DTO CO Power 100 120V 10 48 440 Hz 220 240V 10 48 66 Hz 80 VA maximum Weight Net 5 9 kg 12 8 lb Shipping 13 kg 28 6 1b Dimensions 133 mm H X 213 mm W X 513 mm D 5 25 X 8 36 X 20 2 inches HP System II size 514 H X Y MW X 20D EMI Meets conducted and radiated interference of VDE 0871 6 78 class B radiated at 10 meters Meets MIL 461B con ducted CE03 and radiated REO2 interference Supplemental Characteristics Output impedance Typically 502 3 0 1 Hz to 600 kHz Note Specifications for Option 005 and above are listed in the individual option supplements at the end of section 3 3A 3B 3C ETC rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A General Information 1 5 OPTIONS NOTE Refer to pages 2 and 3 of table 1 1 for a complete listing of specifications for the electrical options Electrical and mechanical options are available and may have been ordered and received with the Multifunction Synthesizer The options are listed in paragraphs 1 6 and 1 7 These options may be retrofitted to the instrument as follows To add Option 001 make arrangements with the nearest HP office to order HP part number 11816A and have the option installed To add Option 002 order HP part number 11817A The kit can be installed by the user or at an HP Service Center To add Option 003 make arrangements with the nearest HP office to order HP part number 11818A and have the option installed To change an instr
68. 120 Binary sequence period 130 5 ms on level 5 volts 140 and off level 0 2 volt 150 160 OUTPUT 726 SEQPIET WSQ000100110111 SEQEIZET Set sequence pointer 1 170 write seguence 180 000100110111 and set 200 sequence end 12 201 10 OUTPUT 726 RUNC Run sequence continuously 300 END Figure C 3 Sample Program for Configuring a Digital Sequence String Destination Query Port Status 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 1390 200 HP IB Codes C 9 Table C 3 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used with Option 02 Instruments Form DE lt Channel gt lt Destination gt Examples DEAOF DEBOC2 Set destination Valid data values for destination are OC1 OC2 and OF Form QRE Example QRE Query present enable status ERRER REL ALA AAA AAR L LALA AA HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language programming example for the HP 8964A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER e Option 0 ERRE RRE RE RHK NR LRA ARALAR AA R EX OUTPUT 7264 PS Preset HP 89044 OUTPUT 726 6M0 Goto channel configuration mode j OUTPUT 726 FRA2KZ APAZUL PHA45DG WFASQ t Set channel A frequency 2 kHz amplitude 2 volts phase 45 degress and waveform square OUTPUT 7276 FRB2KZ APB2VL PHB90DG WFBSQ Set channel B frequency l2 kHz amplitude 2 volts phase 90 degress and waveform square END Figure C 4 Sample Program for Configu
69. 2 key The following pre emphasis settings are available e Off o 25s o 50us 6 75 pus 3C 10 HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements A A AAA AAA A A A A A A A A A A T HP IB Operation The following HP IB information is specific to FM Stereo Composite Generator operation Additional information on remote operation using HP IB is provided in section 3 Composite Level CL Form CL lt amplitude gt lt terminator gt Example CL1 9VL Set Composite Level Valid terminators are are VL MV and UV Frequency C arrier F 4 Form CF lt freq value gt lt terminator gt l Example CF38 0KZ Set Carrier Frequency Valid terminators are HZ and KZ Form PF lt freq value gt lt terminator gt Example PF19 0K2 Set Pilot Frequency Valid terminators are HZ andk KZ Form TF lt freq value gt lt terminator gt Example TF1 0KZ Set Tone Frequency Valid terminators are HZ and KZ Form PL lt level value gt lt terminator gt Example PL10 0 PC i Set Pilot Level Valid terminators are and PC Form PP lt phase value gt lt terminator gt Example PP59 3DG Set Pilot Phase Valid terminators are DG and RD 4 Form PL lt level value gt Form PTM lt mode number gt Example PTMO PTM1 Set Pilot Mode 0 Off 1 On Preemphasis Form PEM lt mode number gt Example PEMO PEM3 Set Preemphasis Mode 0 Off 1 25us 2 50us 3 75us Form TMD lt
70. 20 Hz to 7 5 kHz 30 kHz BW 63 dBc rms 0 07 7 5 kHz to 20 kHz 80 kHz BW 55 dBc rms 0 18 20 kHz to 100 kHz 750 kHz BW Phase sine wave Range 0 to 359 99 Resolution 0 19 or 0 001 radians Increment accuracy Relative to 0 for a fixed frequency 0 05 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz DC amplitude Range 0 to 10V open circuit Resolution 31 2 digits Accuracy 20 mV or 2 1 whichever is greater Gaussian Noise Spectral Characteristic Equal energy per unit bandwidth white Amplitude range 0 to 10V into a 502 load Resolution 31 2 digits Mathematically Derived Characteristics Noise flatness amplitude gt 100 mV __ into 509 0 5 dB 0 1Hzto100kHz 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 600 kHz Peak Voltage Crest Factor X 2 X Bandwidth Vpk ADD VB 1 Noise Voltage y Hz rev 01NOV89 Supplemental Characteristics Number of channels One standard two with Option 002 four with Option 001 Standard waveforms Sine square triangle ramp dc and Gaussian white noise AC amplitude accuracy Typically Square wave lt 3 at 20 kHz Triangle lt 4 at 20 kHz Gaussian noise lt 5 Ramp lt 7 at 20 kHz Square wave risetime falltime Typically lt 2 5 us Spurious typically the higher of 50 dBc or 500 HV y 100 kHz to 600 kHz 20 MHz BW Noise crest factor Typically gt 4 4 Switching speed via HP IB Typically lt 25 ms Typical THD Noise in 80 kHz measureme
71. 3 18 Stereo Phase Test Signal 4 6 summation 2 16 2 20 Options 01 and 02 combined 4 8 Tone Configuration 3 4 Tone Register 3 5 Tone Sequence Mode 3 3 HP IB Codes C 4 specifications 3 18 Two Output Ports 4 1 Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Train 2 24 Variable Phase Signal 4 7 VOR Composite Signal 2 23 W WAVEFORM 1 10 For information about Hewlett Packard products and services telephone the local Hewlett Packard sales and support office listed in your telephone directory Or write to the appropriate address listed here United States Hewlett Packard Company Microwave and Communications Group 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 Hewlett Packard Company 4 Choke Cherry Road Rockville MD 20850 Hewlett Packard Company 5201 Tollview Drive Rolling Meadows IL 60008 Hewlett Packard Company 5161 Lankershim Blvd North Hollywood CA 91601 Hewlett Packard Company 2000 South Park Place Atlanta GA 30339 LA prcrano Canada Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 6877 Goreway Drive Mississauga Ontario Canada L4V1M8 Europe and Africa Hewlett Packard S A P O Box 529 1180 AM Amstelveen The Netherlands Australasia Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia Japan Yokagawa Hewlett Packard Ltd 29 21 Takaido Higashi 3 Chome Suginami ku Tokyo 168 Japan Far East Area Hewlett Packard Asia Headquarters 47th F China Resources Bldg 26 Harbour Road
72. 3 6 Standard Instrument Creating a Simple Signal From Digital Data 3 6 How the HP 8904A Generates a Signal 0 00 eee eee eee en ee eee 3 7 Operating Considerations All Instruments 0 000 a ee eee eee ene 3 7 Abbreviated Channel A Specifications oo 838 Option 001 Three More Channels Summation Modulation and Sequencing 3 9 Expanded Capabilities for Option 001 20 2 0 0 0 00000 eee ee ee ee eee 3C 1 Operating Considerations Option 001 0 cc eee ee a a ee ee eee 3 10 Abbreviated Specifications Option 001 0 0 eee eee ee eee ee eee 3 10 Option 002 A Second Channel and Output 0 2 2 00 eee e eee eee 3 12 Operating Considerations Option 002 0 000 ce eee eee eee ee eee 3 12 Abbreviated Specifications Option 002 0 0 0 0000 cee eee eee ee ees 3 12 Option 003 Frequency Amplitude and Phase Hopping aoaaa aaa 3 13 Operating Considerations Option 003 0000 0c eee eee ee ee ee eee 3 14 Abbreviated Specifications Option 003 0 000 ee eee ee a ee ee eee 3 14 Dira PO cb eh arson Beck en gn de oe vee rd Sed ee Ga eds Eo eed oe Oe Bee des 3 15 General Information lt lt ee ieta dhe wale SSO ew Sid BS Ew eA ba RS Pek we ee ES 3 15 Connector PUNCHIONS arras Hee eae Gh awe Pe Rod he ERT B BUR a 3 15 Remote Operation QM 2 1 ee ee 3 18 General Information Saa ice re ae a a ad eee S A eee
73. 314A NOTE Counters generally do not have an absolute accuracy specification Rather the accuracy of the counter is the absolute accuracy of the time standard against which the counter s time base is adjusted degraded by aging environmental changes and the last digit uncertainty The counter used in this test should be calibrated to within 5 ppm that is 50 Hz out of 10 MHz Procedure 1 Connect the frequency counter s input to the Multifunction Synthesizer s rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector 2 Set the counter to read frequency with at least 10 Hz resolution The counter should read between 9 999 500 and 10 000 500 Hz that is 10 MHz 500 Hz or 50 ppm 10 MHz Time Base Accuracy 9999500_________ 10 000 500 Hz Performance Test 1 4 3 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 2 AC AND DC AMPLITUDE ACCURACY EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Specification Characteristic Performance Limits Conditions AC Amplitude sine wave Range 0 to 10 Vpp into 500 Accuracy gt 40 mVpp into an open circuit 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz 100 to 600 kHz DC Amplitude Range 0 to 10V open circuit Accuracy 21 mV or 2 1 whichever is higher Description DC amplitude accuracy is measured directly with a voltmeter Each 6 dB attenuation range down to the range for 10 mV is measured To measure ac amplitude accuracy a de signal is applied to the high impedance input of an oscilloscope This amplitude becomes a reference
74. 35 ns from the delay measured in step 7 If the difference is negative use 0 Computed Delay _________ns 9 Move the probe of channel B to test point A2TP4 10 On the Multifunction Synthesizer toggle the switches on array A2S4 one at a time until the positive going edges of the signal on channel B lag the positive going edges on A by the delay computed in step 8 to within 7 ns Adjusting A2S3 11 Move the probe of channel B to test point A2TP3 Toggle the switches on array A2S3 one at a time until the positive going edge of channel B lags the positive going edge of channel A by 48 to 62 ns Adjustment 7 5 15 Adjustrients Tools ea a E ana deceo II ee Aeaee ee reenter ss EAER A EEE EEL Aoaaae OE fib nee ene a E Egs No 2 Pozidriv Screwdriver Needlenose Pliers PC Board Extractor included with Service Manual ar order HP 08904 00013 1 Turn instrument off unplug power cord and remove bottom cover NS Disconnect ribbon Cable W17 from A10J1 Y Remove hold down screw and washer from center of A10 Ouput Assembly using Pozidriv screwdriver 4 Pull A10 from each of its seven mounting posts Release each mounting post by compressing the holding tang on mounting post with needienose pliers while applying gentle upward pressure with the PC board extractor Extractor should exert pressure on metal shield not on PC board except where post does not extend through shield 5 Lift A10 from instrument a
75. 5 lt 06 ockc ees edsedwn te A tai e HP 3325A 4 22 Performance Test 7 Model 8904A Performance Tests HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION OSCILLOSCOPE SYNTHESIZER SE S D D G D D G G oa toto 18 MHz 18 MHz os REF OUT REF INPUT D C E L C OUTPUTS X INPUT Y INPUT OUTPUT 1 HIGH Figure 4 3 Phase Accuracy Performance Test Setup Procedure Output 1 NOTE If the instrument has an Option 002 and 006 combination skip to step 6 1 Set up the equipment as follows Refer to Figure 4 3 a Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer s rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT to the reference synthesizer s 10 MHz reference input and set the reference synthesizer to accept an external reference NOTE Alternatively the Multifunction Synthesizer may be connected to accept a 10 MHz reference from the reference synthesizer if needed b Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the oscilloscope s de coupled X input Switch the oscilloscope s input impedance to 502 or terminate the input in 501 using a tee c Connect the reference synthesizer s output to the oscilloscope s de coupled Y input Switch the oscilloscope s input impedance to 502 or terminate the input in 502 using a tee 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 1 V PHASE INCR SET 18 deg Performance Test 7 4 23 Performance T
76. 70 180 190 200 3 28 Model 8904A Table 3 6 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used with Option 002 Instruments Description Form DE lt Channel gt lt Destination gt Examples DEAOF DEBOC2 Set destination Valid data values for destination are OC1 OC2 and OF Must also have Opt 001 with these two commands Z YY TT YT YT T TY T A T T T T T T T T Y T T T T E T E T T Y T Y T AAA AAA R Y Y HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language programming example for the HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER 0 9 L OPTION 002 T TY T Y AA CARA TY T RARA T T E TY TY T T Y E T ADA T T TY TY T RADAR T TY T TY p T AAA CADA Y X Y AA T T AAA l OUTPUT 726 PS Preset HP 8904A OUT 726 GMO Goto channel configuration mode l OUTPUT 726 FRA2KZ APA2VL PHA45DG WFASQ Set channel A frequency 2 kHz amplitude volts phase 45 degrees and waveform square OUTPUT 726 FRB2KZ APB2VL PHB90DG WFBSQ 1 Set channel B frequency 2 kHz amplitude 2 volts phase 190 degrees and waveform square END Figure 3 11 Sample Program for Configuring Output Ports 1 and 2 rev O1JUL91 Model 8904A Amplitude Digital Port Frequency Hop Register Query Port Status Table 3 7 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used with Option 003 Instruments HP IB D oti Code escription Form APH lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt
77. 81 a l t x P START O Hz Bw 19 097 Hz STOP 2 000 Hz X 1000 Hz Y 9 00 dBV Figure 4 9 Tone Burst Spectrum with Suppressed 1200 Hz Sideband 4 40 Performance Test 12 Model 8904A Performance Tests Performance Test 13 DTMF SEQUENCE TIMING ACCURACY OPTION 001 Specification MEAT oe ome DTMF Sequence Option 001 On time Duration 0 1 to 655 35 ms except 0 off time and 0 on time Off time Duration 0 1 to 655 35 ms except 0 off time and 0 on time Timing Accuracy 1ms Description A tone burst of several cycles of DTMF Tone 0 is set up and observed on an oscilloscope By incrementing the duration of the burst the on time the nominal on time is made to exactly synchronize with the fourteenth zero crossing of the burst The total on time incrementing equals the on time error The burst s off time is measured directly on the oscilloscope NOTE For instruments with Option 006 balanced output even though the DTMF sequences appear at Output 1 DTMF sequence timing accuracy is not specified Equipment 6 illosCOpG ii evesicuin ean tank pee ATA N nae ee See HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Procedure On Time Accuracy 1 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the high impedance ac coupled oscilloscope s input 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in NEXT f3 DTMF Sequence NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF f2 On Time 5 27 ms f4
78. 904A Functions 3 of 4 Form PH lt Channel gt lt Phase Value gt lt Terminator gt Example PHA45DG Set phase of a channel Valid terminators are DG and RD MS Phase reset establishes a common zero reference for the channels e rea 7 Form lt Data Setting gt Examples FRA FRAIS 7 Query of existing data values is achieved by placing the term after the desired item name A query terminates any presently running sequence Query Data Form RC lt Register gt Example RC11 uk Recall Valid data values for Recall are 0 11 Reverse Power Ka Reset reverse power protection Save l Form SV lt Register gt Example SVT Save Valid data values for Save are 0 11 Service RM 1 Form RM Request _ Read Service Request Mask The present value of the SRQ mask is returned 000 191 4 Form SM lt Data Value gt Examples SM128 SMO Set Service Request Mask Valid data 0 255 Special i Form SF lt Data Value gt punchous Examples SF4 SF12763 Set or Reset Special Functions The value of the Special Function flag can be read at any time but can only be set at the Main Selection Level The flag is a composite of bit flags A Special Function operation configures all 16 bits of the flag that is any previously set flags are lost Do not leave a space between the mnemonic and the data value C 4 HP IB Codes Table C 1 HP IB Codes
79. 904A exits the Channel Configuration Mode and then re enters it or any other operating mode all parameters are reset to their default settings Recall Your Settings 6 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the RECALL key to access the f Recall Register display 7 Press the 1 key and then press the ENTER key The HP 8904A is now returned to the same operating state it was in when you set up Save Register 1 ch A FREG 20 90 16 98 Y PHASE G B deg MFORN gt a DESTH Quti Remember When you Recall a Save Register the HP 8904A returns all of its parameters except Special Functions to the same settings that existed when the Save Register was selected 1 20 Meet the HP 8904A How to Turn The ye cor permit you S a the HP 8904A s operation to best meet your needs In this demonstration you wi On the Sp ecial turn on the Special Function that configures the HP 8904A to power Functions up to the state it was in before power was turned off rather than to the Main Selection Level 1 Switch the white LINE key off for a few seconds and then back on Notice that the HP 8904A has powered up to the Main Selection Level Access the 2 Press the blue SHIFT key and the SPECIAL key to access the HP 8904A s Special Function display This display allows you to turn on the HP 8904A s Special Function capabilities ed on power up O A CA AS Ad we ee Turn On Special 3 Press the f2 gt L aT UZ softkey and then press the ON k
80. 94 Vdc 5 01 V 5 115 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 5V 5 105 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 5V 2 553 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 25 V 1 276 Vdc 1 224 Vdc 625 mV 646 mVdc 604 mVdc 312 mV 333 mVdc 291 mVdc 156 2 mV 177 2 mVdc 135 2 mVdc 78 1 mV 99 1 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 39 0 mV 60 0 mVdc 18 0 mVdc 19 5 mV 40 5 mVdc 1 5 mVdc 10 0 mV 31 0 mVdc 11 0 mVdc AC Amplitude Accuracy Output 2 9 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 8 V Set the oscilloscope s vertical sensitivity to 2 V division Adjust the vertical position of the dc trace to coincide with the second graticule line from the top of the screen 10 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in WAVE FORM y Set the frequency indicated in the following table The amplitude is to remain the same as set in step 9 that is 8V For each setting adjust the oscilloscope s time scale to obtain a useable display and note the peak amplitude relative to the second graticule line The peak amplitude should be within the limits listed in the table NOTE Refer to the notes following step 5 4 8 Performance Test 2 Model 8904A Performance Tests Peak Difference Limits divisions Frequency Sale L 0 1 1 000 100 000 600 000 Performance Test 2 4 9 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 3 AC AMPLITUDE FLATNESS EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 4 10 Specifi
81. Agilent Technologies Inc www agilent com 24001 E Mission Liberty Lake WA 99019 Agilent Technologies Innovating the HP Way June 8 2000 Dear Customer As of November 1 1999 four of Hewlett Packard s businesses test and measurement semiconductor products health care solutions and chemical analysis became a new company Agilent Technologies Now many of your Hewlett Packard products and services are in the care of Agilent Technologies At Agilent Technologies we are working diligently to make this transition as smooth as possible for you However as a result of this transition the products and related documentation contained in this shipment may be labeled with either the Hewlett Packard name and logo the Agilent Technologies name and logo or a combination of both Information in this package may refer to Hewlett Packard HP but applies to your Agilent Technologies product Hewlett Packard and Agilent branded products with the same model number are interchangeable Whatever logo you see the information products and services come from the same reliable source If you have questions about Agilent Technologies products and services please visit our website at http www agilent com Sincerely Rebranding Team HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER Including Options 001 002 003 004 005 and 006 Operation and Calibration Manual SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments with seria
82. B 38 1470 uV 42 14 6 12 24 dB 19 0735 uV 48 16 48 dB 9 5367 uV 54 18 6 48 dB 4 7684 uV 60 21 12 48 dB 2 3842 uV 66 22 6 12 48 dB 1 1920 uV 72 25 24 48 dB 1 0000 uV 78 27 6 24 48 dB 1 0000 uV 84 29 12 24 48 dB 1 0000 uV 90 31 6 12 24 48 dB 1 0000 uV The multiplier is used to fill in the fine level steps between the 6 dB analog attenuator steps Approximately half of the 12 bit scale of the multiplier is used for setting the fine levels This means that for each 6 dB wide window there are 2048 possible fine amplitude steps 212 4096 4086 2048 While this arrangement yields a constant number of steps per 6 dB attenuator range the resolution in volts is twice as fine for every 6 dB attenuator used For example the actual resolution in the 10 to 5 01 V range is 10V 5V next fullscalerange LO 2048steps 2048 Resolution 2 441 mV For the 5 to 2 51 V range the resolution is Resolution anis Resolution 1 222 mV The minimum resolution is limited to 1 uV for the bottom of four ranges As mentioned before this fine resolution is not displayed on the front panel due to lack of display space Steps this fine may be programmed over HP IB or input from the front panel To get small steps from the front panel the amplitude increment function must be used For example on the 10 volt full scale range an amplitude increment of 2 44 mV could be set The the amplitude can be stepped up or down by this amount using t
83. BW 20 kHz 10V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 20 Hz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW 4 48 Model 8904A Test No Performance Tests Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 5 of 7 Test Description SPECTRAL PURITY OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Frequency and Amplitude Settings 300 Hz 10V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 10V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 10V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 10V 750 kHz BW 30 Hz 1V 30 kHz BW 300 Hz 1V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 1V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 1V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 1V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 1V 750 kHz BW 20 Hz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 30 kHz BW 7 5 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 80 kHz BW 20 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW 100 kHz 0 14V 750 kHz BW 7 PHASE ACCURACY USING AN OSCILLOSCOPE Output 1 Frequency Setting 100 kHz 50 kHz 20 kHz 1 kHz 100 Hz Output 2 Option 002 Frequency Setting 100 kHz 50 kHz 20 kHz 1 kHz 100 Hz 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 0 05 deg 4 49 Performance Tests Model 8904A No 4 50 Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 6 of 7 PHASE ACCURACY USING A TIME INTERVAL COUNTER Output 1 Frequency and Phase Settings 29 2 ns 279 2 ns 2779 2 ns 100 kHz 1 deg 1
84. C IEEE A TEEN E TE TEA lt 4570 meters 15 000 feet Bench Operation The instrument cabinet has plastic feet and a foldaway tilt stand for convenience in bench operation The plastic feet are shaped to ensure self alignment of instruments when they are stacked The tilt stand raises the front of the Multifunction Synthesizer for easier viewing of the front panel Rack Mounting Rack mounting information is provided with the rack mounting kits If a kit was not ordered with the Multifunction Synthesizer as an option it may be ordered through the nearest Hewlett Packard office rev 0O1JUL91 Model 8904A Installation 2 4 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT Environment The instrument should be stored in a clean dry environment The following environmental limitations apply to both storage and shipment OOE E E ETA A A R aga 20 Cto 75 C PUM bY 552s acess EEE E E E TOE E E lt 95 relative at 40 C o EE E A a EE lt 15 300 meters 50 000 feet Packaging Original Packaging Containers and materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through Hewlett Packard offices If the instrument is being returned to Hewlett Packard for servicing attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial num ber Also mark the container FRAGILE to assure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number Other Packaging The fo
85. CURACY OPTION 005 Nuii at 10 kHz 179 9 deg 180 1 deg Null at 100 kHz 178 0 deg 182 0 deg TONE SEQUENCE TIMING ACCURACY OPTION 001 On Time Timing 4 98 ms Off Time Timing Difference 0 01 ms DTMF SEQUENCE TIMING ACCURACY OPTION 001 On Time Timing Off Time Timing DIGITAL SEQUENCE PERIOD ACCURACY OPTION 001 On Period Model 8904A Adjustments Section 5 ADJUSTMENTS 5 1 INTRODUCTION This section contains adjustments and checks that assure peak performance of the Multifunction Synthesizer The instrument should be readjusted after repair or failure to pass a performance test Allow a 10 minute warm up prior to performing the adjustments Removing the top and bottom covers is the only disassembly required for most adjustments on a standard instrument An instrument with two outputs Option 002 will require removing the A10 Output Assembly if the A3 Output Assembly requires adjustment The disassembly procedure is shown in Figure 5 4 NOTE The instrument has been fully tested and calibrated prior to shipment It is preferable that no adjustments be made to the instrument unless it has failed during performance testing see Section 4 To determine which performance tests and adjustments to perform after a repair refer to paragraph 5 4 Post Repair Tests Adjustments and Checks 5 2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS This section contains information cautions and warnings which must be followed for your protection
86. Continuous f3 Single f4 Stop 72 anual AMP TO 146 p Y ontinuous f3 Single f4 Stop f1 Seq Base Hex 3 Period 10 ms ff Time 1 00ms f2 On Lev 148 yV f4 Off Lev Bu eq Index 1 8123456 789ABCD 3 45 SRA ES aaa WD prcrano AE BH Ke aE OA MCS A TR TS ATI n baz ARAN A coca Hi II RA a KE h g IA A A aini AR MONSTER REA e e mn e ans c ST eae A Aaa semen EVE W kannan OT AA AREENA TE 8 aaa Tara R ENTE S lann A O e c A a ti al n Kann m TR ky we NES ean perra TIRA TA n AEM ald E AN 0 Ie AA cm rr SU V naer 1s os E peepee ee aR NE tah RS Tae enar a HEN eT WI br D Pore a EN A Py py abe ete A ARF Ae RAE TEE oan rm Pn ag i ATRL ra ERA A a ion icat Multifunction Synthesizer ion Made Easy HP 8904A HP 8904A Operat Basic Operation and Appl Table of Contents 1 Meet the HP 8904A Learn how to operate your HP 8904A Option 01 2 Modulate or Sum the Signals Learn how to use the many modulation and summation sa ne rg provided by an HP 8904A equipped with four channels 3 Output a Sequence of Signals Learn how to output a sequence of Tone Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF or Digital signals Option 02 4 Output Two Signals at Once Learn how to operate an HP 8904A equipped with Dual Output Ports Option 03 5 Hop the Output Signal Learn how to dd the frequency amplitude and phase of the out
87. Control Commands for Option 005 Two new Special Function HP IB codes are used with Option 005 HP 8904As The binary weighted codes are entered as an ASCII equivalent to enable disable or read the status of the phase synchronization special functions For more information on how special functions are programmed refer to table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 4 of 5 Special Flag Bit Assignments Using these bit patterns the ASCII value for special function 6 is 64 The ASCII value of special function 7 is 128 Programming Considerations Always interconnect the instruments prior to enabling these special functions An error message is displayed if the proper clock and synchronization signals are not present when these special functions are enabled Every time the Set Function SF command is used to set the special functions the previous special function settings are removed When setting multiple special functions add the values for all the functions to arrive at the proper ASCII number For instance if you are setting specials 6 and 7 for an instrument add their values together 64 128 to arrive at the proper special function setting value 192 This setup is used in the following programming example 3A 8 HP 8904A Option 005 A A A A A A A A A A A A A ee Remote Programming Example 10 HP 8904A Option 005 remote operation example 20 This program sets the special functions and then 30 r
88. DC or low frequency signals This characteristic prevents Option 006 from outputting digital sequences provided with Option 001 Refer to the accompanying specifications for additional operating parameters 3B 2 HP 8904A Option 006 HP 8904A Option All specifications for the standard 500 output are degraded by the 006 Specifications accuracy flatness and distortion specifications of the 6000 transformer coupled output Output Type Fully floating balanced transformer coupled Usable Output Frequency Range 30 Hz to 200 kHz AC Amplitude Sine Wave Only Range Open circuit 0 to 20 V rms 6000 load 0 to 10 V rms 1500 load 0 to 4 V rms 509 load 0 to 1 5 V rms Resolution 3 Z digits Accuracy amplitude gt 40 mV rms into a 6000 load 6 0 5 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 12 1 0 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Flatness amplitude gt 40 mV rms into a 6000 load 0 15 dB 0 15 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 0 15 dB 0 75 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Spectral Purity Sine Wave Only THD N including spurs amplitude 140 mV rms to 10 V rms into a 6002 load 46 dB 0 5 30 Hz to 300 Hz 30 kHz BW amplitude lt 1 V rms into a 60002 load 60 dBc 0 10 300 Hz to 7 5 kHz 30 kHz BW 63 dBc 0 07 7 5 kHz to 20 kHz 80 kHz BW 55 dBc 0 18 20 kHz to 100 kHz 750 kHz BW Supplemental Characteristics Balance Typically gt 40 dB 30 Hz to 50 kHz Flatness Amplitude gt 40 mV rms into a balanced 6002 load Typically
89. Example Set address of HOP RAM HRA Addresses 0 to 15 are valid valid terminator is ET HRAQ2ET or HRA 15 ET Set frequency of HOP RAM FRH 0 Hz to 600 kHz range valid terminators are HZ and KZ FHR 723 5 Hz Set amplitude of HOP RAM APH valid terminators are UV MV and VL APH 1 999 VL Set phase of HOP RAM PHH valid range is 0 to 359 9 deg valid terminators are DG or RD PHH 90 DG or PHH 3 14 RD Write sequence stringt WSO Entry string is terminated by CR LF or EOI WSQ0123456789ABCDEF or W5Q0100010100010001000100100111 Copy attribute freq phase amplitude of the presently selected hop ram location into all 16 hop ram locations COPY FRH PHR APH followed by COPY HRA 02 ET APH COPY or PHH COPY Set burst length BL BL followed by length from 1 to 127 then ET BL 127 ET Set hop frequency rate REO RFQ followed by value from 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz then HZ or KZ RFQ 600 Hz or RFQ 2 4 KZ T The HP 8904A will accept a sequence string up 250 characters in length To fill up the available 750 character sequence string in the HP 8904A three strings of 250 characters must be sent If a binary sequence is being used the EDIT BASE must be hexadecimal and the sequence string must be hex cod
90. HASE 180 deg INCR SET 1 deg 3 On the reference Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in SHIFT SPECIAL 6 ENTER f2 Status ON f4 f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 10 kHz AMPTD 1 V 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test key in SHIFT d RESET Adjust the oscilloscope vertical gain and sweep speed to view the nearly nulled 10 kHz outputs from the Multifunction Synthesizers 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test press AMPTD then press the or O keys if necessary to minimize the 10 kHz signal on the oscilloscope Performance Test 11 4 35 Performance Tests Model 8904A NOTE Ignore any high frequency fuzziness on the signal The only concern is to minimize the 10 kHz component On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test press PHASE then press the T or U keys a few times to locate the null of the 10 kHz signal The null should occur between 179 9 and 180 1 deg At 10 kHz 0 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 179 9 180 1 deg On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test key in FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 1 V PHASE 180 deg 8 On the reference Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 1 V 9 On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test press AMPTD then press the ft or Q keys if 10 necessary to minimize the 100 kHz signal on the oscilloscope as was done in step 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test
91. M ZSC 4 3 or equivalent lt 8 units synchronized Mini Circuits ZFSC 8 1 or equivalent 3B High Power Balanced Output Introduction General Description Operating Considerations HP 8904A Option 006 id rns This document is a supplement to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide and the Operation and Calibration Manual It contains operation and reference information specific to HP 8904As with Option 006 installed The HP 8904A Option 006 replaces the standard 500 output of Output 1 with a true transformer coupled 6009 output This 6000 full floating output provides higher power than the standard 500 output and can be configured as either single ended or balanced This capability is only available for Output 1 Option 006 can not be installed in combination with Option 004 Rear Panel Outputs A second output can be installed to provide a 500 output by ordering Option 002 The amplitude displayed on the instrument s front panel assumes an external load of 6009 Connecting a high impedance load results in an amplitude of up to twice that indicated for Output 1 The Option 006 output is specified for sinewaves only and for the frequency range of 30 Hz to 100 kHz Output frequencies up to 200 kHz are available if the typical 4dB rolloff characteristic of the transformer is acceptable Due to the nature of a transformer coupled output the Option 006 output can not pass
92. N 1 AMPTD 1 V INCR SET 5 mV PHASE 180 deg INCR SET 1 deg NOTE For instruments with Option 002 and 006 key in SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF rather than SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF in the step above and key in SHIFT DESTN 2 rather than SHIFT DESTN 1 3 Adjust the oscilloscope vertical gain and sweep speed to view the nearly nulled 10 kHz output from the Multifunction Synthesizer 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press AMPTD then press the f or D keys if necessary to minimize the 10 kHz signal on the oscilloscope NOTE To get a feel for the nature of this measurement press the amplitude increment keys a few times to un null the two signals being summed and observe the nature of the signal being monitored Then re null the signal and proceed Ignore any high frequency fuzziness on the signal The only concern is to minimize the 10 kHz component 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press PHASE then press the ft or D keys a few times to locate the null of the 10 kHz signal The null should occur between 179 9 and 180 1 deg At 10 kHz 0 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 1799 __________ 180 1 deg 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in LAST FREQ 100 kHz NEXT FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 1 V PHASE 180 deg 7 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press AMPTD then press the 7 or D keys if necessary to minimize the 100 kHz signal on the oscilloscope as was done in step 4 8 On the Multifunction Synthesizer pres
93. NC CLOCK OUTPUT signal must be routed back to this connector for the instrument to function properly RESET OUTPUT This connection provides an output for the internal phase reset signal This signal establishes a common phase starting point for the output signals It provides the Master phase reset signal for connecting two or more HP 8904As for phase synchronization This signal is not used when the instrument is configured as a Slave HP 8904A Option 005 3A 3 A A A A A U RESET INPUT The RESET OUTPUT signal is input here to provide the phase reset signal that establishes a new phase starting point for the output signals If the instrument is configured as the Master controller its own RESET OUTPUT signal must be routed back to this connector for the instrument to function properly Detailed Operating Instructions Cable Connections Power Splitters Low loss power splitters must be used to provide the necessary impedance match and signal distribution to each instrument Terminate any unused power splitter outputs with a 500 load Recommended power splitters are listed in the specifications at the end of this supplement Cable Length Since phase delay is directly proportional to conductor length the length of all cables should be the same when they share a common signal from the Master controller Cable length from the Master controller to the power splitters is not critical cable length from the splitters to t
94. OUTPUT SIGNAL Figure 1 6 The Output Signal is Switched Away from the Output Port when the Output is Turned Off 1 14 Meet the HP 8904A A l 4 Now press the FREQ key and enter 20 kHz 5 Press the AMPTD key and enter 10V Ten volts is the maximum output amplitude provided by the HP 8904A 6 Adjust the volts division setting for Channel A on the oscilloscope to 5V and the time division setting to 20 us Turn On the Output 7 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the OUTPUT key to access the Output Control display E 8 Enter 1 and then press the ON key Note that the ON LED for pai OUTPUT 1 is now lit Turning the HP 8904A s Output Port off can be useful when you wish to make changes to the output signal but you do not want the intermediate transitions present at the output Meet the HP 8904A 1 15 A A A A A rn Channel versus Output In the HP 8904A Channel refers to an internal synthesized signal source The standard HP 8904A configuration provides a single channel Instruments with Option 01 capabilities have four channels and those with Option 02 only have two channels Each channel provides six waveform choices sine ramp triangle square noise and dc Output refers to an HP 8904A Output Port The standard HP 8904A configuration provides 1 Output Port Option 02 adds a second Output Port CHANN OUTPUT 1 Figure 1 7 The Standard HP 8904A Configuration Provides One Channel and One Output P
95. PUT 726 PS GMO Preset amp go to channel 390 configuration mode 198 119 OUTPUT 726 HRAQET FRHS HZ APHIVL l Set Hop Ram address 120 l Hop Freq 500 Hz Hop 130 Amplitude 1 volt 140 15 OUTPUT 726 HRAIET FRHIKZ APH2VL Set Hop Ram address 1 160 Hop Freq 1 kHz Hop 170 Amplitude 2 volt 18 190 OUTPUT 726 HRAZET FRHI SKZ APH3VL Set Hop Ram address 2 200 Hop Freq 1 5 kHz Hop 210 Amplitude 3 volt 220 230 OUTPUT 726 HRASET FRH2KZ APH4UL Set Hop Ram address 3 240 Hop Freq 2 kHz Hop 250 l Amplitude 4 volts 260 270 OUTPUT 726 HRA4ET FRH2 5KZ APHSUL Set Hop Ram address 4 280 l Hop Freg 2 5 kHz Hop 290 Amplitude 5 volt 309 330 Amplitude 6 volts 340 350 OUTPUT 726 FHRON AHRON Turn frequency hop on 360 l and turn amplitude hop on 370 380 FOR I 1 TO 100 Repeat hop seq 100 times 390 FOR J TO 5 Step from add 0 TO add 5 400 OUTPUT 72563 HRA sd El i Hop to next address 410 NEXT J 420 NEXT I 430 END Figure C 5 Sample Program for Hop Mode Operation Index PL IO_EO_RTmm TT Ro aR TES DSB 2 5 2 6 2 8 gt O O address selection 5 9 AM 2 5 maximum setting 2 14 ranges 2 21 amplitude 1 22 displayed level 1 9 AMPTD 1 9 Amptd Hop 5 6 backspace 1 8 channel 1 15 summation 2 16 Channel A Channel Configuration Mode 1 7 Hop Mode 5 4 5 7 5 11 modulation 2 9 sample HP IB program C 4
96. Packard Company HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Serial Number No Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 1 of 7 Test Description FREQUENCY ACCURACY 10 MHz Time Base Accuracy Tested By Date AC AND DC AMPLITUDE ACCURACY EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 DC Amplitude Accuracy Output 1 Amplitude Setting 10V 5 01 V 5V 2 5 V 1 25 V 625 mV 312 mV 156 2 mV 78 1 mV 39 0 mV 19 5 mV 10 0 mV 10 V 5 01 V 5 V 2 5 V 1 25 V 625 mV 312 mV 156 2 mV 78 1 mV 39 0 mV 19 5 mV 10 0 mV 9 794 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 224 Vdc 604 mVdc 291 mVdc 135 2 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 18 0 mVdc 1 5 mVdc 11 0 mVdc 10 21 Vdc 5 115 Vdc 5 105 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 646 mVdc 333 mVdc 177 2 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 60 0 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 31 0 mVdc Performance Tests 9 999 500 Hz aa 10 000 500 Hz 10 21 Vdc 5 115 Vde 5 105 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 646 mVdc 333 mVdc 177 2 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 60 0 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 31 0 mVdc 9 794 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 244 Vdc 604 mVdc 291 mVdc 135 2 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 18 0 mVde 1 5 mVdc 11 0 mVdc 4 45 Performance Tests Model 8904A Table 4 1 Performance Test Record 2 of 7 Test T Res o ati Minimum Actual Maximum AC AND DC AMPLITUDE ACCURACY EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Continued
97. R TEST HP 8904F MULTIFUNCTION OSCILLOSCOPE SYNTHESIZER SYNC CLOCK INPUT 6 RESET INPUT OUTPUT SPLITTER REFERENCE HP 8904R MULTIFUNCTION RESET INPUT See SYNC CLOCK INPUT Figure 4 6 Unit to Unit Phase Accuracy Performance Test Setup 4 34 Performance Test 11 Model 8904A Performance Tests Procedure 1 Connect the two Multifunction Synthesizers and oscilloscope as noted in the following steps Refer also to Figure 4 6 a All phase reset cables all clock cables and all signal cables must be the same length b The Multifunction Synthesizer under test is the master therefore its rear panel SYNC CLOCK OUTPUT goes to the input of the Clock Splitter and its 6 RESET OUTPUT goes to the input of the Phase Reset Splitter c Connect the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output for both Multifunction Synthesizers together with a tee and connect the tee to the oscilloscope s input Switch the oscilloscope input to 500 or connect a 502 load at the input using a second tee NOTE If either Multifunction Synthesizer has Option 006 in combination with Option 002 and 005 set the destination of Channel A to Output 2 and make the test on Output 2 which should not be floating 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer under test press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in SHIFT SPECIAL 7 ENTER f2 Status ON LAST f2 Status ON f4 f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 10 kHz AMPTD 1 V INCR SET 5 mV P
98. RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS GENERAL This product and related documentation must be re viewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation This product is a Safety Class I instrument provided with a protective earth terminal BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed SAFETY EARTH GROUND An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be pro vided from the main power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set SAFETY SYMBOLS Instruction manual symbol the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual refer to Table of Contents 5 Indicates hazardous voltages lt Indicates earth ground terminal The WARNING sign denotes a WARNING h
99. RRARRAR ARANA RRR OUTPUT 726 PS GMO OUTPUT 726 HRAOET FRH500HZ APH1VL OUTPUT 726 HRA1ET APH2VL OUTPUT 726 HRA2ET FRH1 5KZ APH3VL OUTPUT 726 HRA3ET FRH2KZ APH4VL OUTPUT 726 HRA4ET FRH2 5KZ APHSVL OUTPUT 726 HRASET FRH3KZ APH6VL OUTPUT 726 FHRON AHRON FOR I 1 TO 100 FOR J 0 TO 5 OUT 726 HRA J ET NEXT J NEXT END Model 8904A Preset and go to channel configuration mode Set Hop Ram address 0 Hop Freq 500 Hz Hop Amplitude 1 volt Set Hop Ram address 1 Hop Freq 1 kHz Hop Amplitude 2 volts Set Hop Ram address 2 Hop Freq 1 5 kHz Hop Amplitude 3 volts l Set Hop Ram address 3 Hop Freq 2 kHz Hop Amplitude 4 volts i Set Hop Ram address 4 Hop Freq 2 5 kHz Hop Amplitude 5 volts Set Hop Ram address 5 Hop Freq 3 kHz Hop Amplitude 6 volts 1 Turn frequency hop on and turn amplitude hop on Repeat hop seq 100 times Step from add 0 TO add 5 L Hop to next address Figure 3 12 Sample Program for Hop Mode Operation Model 8904A Operation 3 7 STATUS BYTE General Information The Status Byte provides information concerning instrument conditions Seven of the 8 bits are used to indicate specific problems or instrument conditions that can occur during operation The other bit is used to alert the controller regarding these conditions The operator can use the Stat
100. Selection Level 4 S ti MAIN oin C44 Channel Configuration Mode XX Press NEXTLAST keys f4 Exit ch A FREQ 1686 6 Hz AMPTO 146 vu fl Hop Ram Adres B FREQ 0 0 Hzt fi Digital Port Off f3 Freq Hop OFF Figure 5 1 How to Access Hop Mode Operation 5 4 Hop the Output Signal How to Configure The HP 8904A enables you to hop Channel A s frequency amplitude and or phase settings This demonstration will step you through the Channel A process of entering the settings you wish to have Channel A hop to for Hopping Note Only Channel A s settings can be hopped 1 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V The 1 kHz 1 Vpk Channel A signal should now appear on your oscilloscope Enter the Hop Parameters Note If your HP 8904A is equipped with four channels the Parameter Entry displays for Channels B C and D will precede the Hop Configuration display 2 Press the NEXT key until the Hop Configuration display appears This display allows you to enter the settings you wish to have Channel A hop to The HP 8904A provides 16 Hop Registers 0 through 15 Hop the Output Signal 5 5 Hop Register 0 3 4 Press the FREQ key and enter 5 kHz Press the AMPTD key and enter 2V That is all it takes to store parameters in a Hop Register Hop Register 1 5 Press the f1 Hop Fam Adr softkey and then the 2 key The HP 8904A is now ready to accept parameters for Hop Re
101. TL pulse Hop Ram Sequence with Option 001 Number of different States 16 user definable states each with an amplitude frequency and phase value Waveforms Sine square ramp triangle dc and white Gaussian noise Sequence entry Binary octal or hexidecimal Sequence length up to 3000 tones in binary mode two states used or up to 750 tones in hex mode all 16 states used Sequence clock frequency range 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Sequence clock frequency resolution 0 1 Hz Sequence burst range 1 repetition up to 127 Control modes Manual sequence allows stepping through sequence burst sequence 1 to 127 and continuously repeat sequence Sequence can be triggered by external TTL pulse OPTION 002 SPECIFICATIONS 502 outputs only Output 1 to Output 2 phase accuracy sine waves at the same frequency 0 1 or 30 ns 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz whichever is greater Supplemental Characteristics Output 1 to Output 2 cross talk the higher of Typically 100 dB or 20 uV 0 1 Hz to 20 kHz 95 dB or 20 uV y 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz 90 dB or 30 uV 0 1 Hz to 600 kHz OPTION 003 SPECIFICATIONS 509 outputs only Direct addressing of channel A Up to 16 phase frequency amplitude states of channel A may be preset and directly addressed with four TTL compatible inputs Timing for fast hopping must be provided by an EXTERNAL source Digital modulation By appropriately setting the 16 direct control registers the HP 8904A
102. Using two BNC cables provides maximum shielding where b Using an adapter allows the High and Low Output Ports to High and Low inputs are also available be connected to a single input port Figure 1 9 Cable Connections for the Floating Ground Output Configuration 1 18 Meet the HP 8904A How to Save You can easily save all of the operating settings you have entered and Recall and recall them whenever you wish Your Settings Set Up a Save Register 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and the SAVE key to access the Save Register display HRE A KD LL HR DRE oer is i gg EE me E a R naay y Ahe EN ge amado x 5 cial Cave T TAT E ia exe Ste TTA ALE Cb AAE AAS NZ ACR A A tit th ofumber andsor ENTER 2 Press the 1 key and then the ENTER key You have stored all of the HP 8904A s current settings in Save Register 1 The HP 8904A provides 12 Save Registers 0 11 Now Return to the Main Selection Level 3 Press the blue SHIFT key and the MAIN key The MAIN key returns you to the HP 8904A s Main Selection Level display tion Leve L X Meet the HP 8904A 1 19 AAA AA A A A A A A A Ey 4 Press the ff Channel Contig softkey to return to the Channel Configuration Mode 5 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel A Configuration display Note that each of Channel A s parameters were reset to their default settings when you re entered the Channel Configuration Mode Remember Whenever the HP 8
103. Wanchai Hong Kong Latin America Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Printed in USA 7 87 08904 90006 ee ys A A lt Model 8904A Performance Tests Section 4 PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 1 INTRODUCTION The procedures in this section test the instrument s electrical performance using the specifications of Table 1 1 as performance standards All tests are performed without accessing the interior of the instrument NOTE The instrument should be allowed a 10 minute warm up period prior to beginning the performance tests Line voltage must be within 10 of nominal if the results of the performance tests are to be considered valid 4 2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Equipment required for the performance tests is listed in Table 1 2 Recommended Test Equipment Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications provided in the table may be substituted for the recommended model s 4 3 PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Results of the performance tests may be tabulated on the Performance Test Record at the end of the procedures The Performance Test Record lists all of the tested specifications and their acceptable limits The results recorded at incoming inspection can be used for comparison in periodic maintenance and troubleshooting and after repairs or adjustments 4 4 CALIBRATION CYCLE This instrument requires periodic verification of performance Depending on the use and environmen tal conditions the
104. a Microfiche part number This number may be used to order 100 x 150 millimeter 4 x 6 inch microfilm transparencies of this manual Each microfiche contains up to 96 photo duplicates of the manual s pages The microfiche package also includes the latest Manual Updates information rev 01NOV89 1 1 General Information Model 8904A 1 2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS This product is a Safety Class I instrument that is one provided with a protective earth terminal The Multifunction Synthesizer and all related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation Refer to the Safety Considerations pages found at the beginning of this manual for a summary of the safety information Safety information pertinent to the task at hand that is installation operation performance testing and adjustments is found throughout this manual 1 3 DESCRIPTION The HP 8904A is a Multifunction Frequency Synthesizer that produces six fundamental waveforms to create complex signals The waveforms available are dc sine wave ramp sawtooth triangle square wave and white Gaussian noise The standard instrument is equipped with a single internal channel and one output The addition of available options can provide a second signal output port three additional internal channels with modulation capabilities and the ability to fast hop between different phase frequency and amplitude settings Multi inst
105. ame serial number prefix es as listed under SERIAL NUMBERS on the respective manual title pages For information concerning a serial number prefix not listed on the title page or in the Manual Update packets contact your nearest Hewlett Packard office An instrument manufactured after the printing of these manuals may have a serial number prefix that is not listed on the manual title page Having a serial number prefix that is greater than that shown on the title page indicates that the instrument is slightly different from those documented in the manual In this case your manual is provided with updating information to make it as current as possible This updating information includes any hardware or software changes that have occurred as well as corrections to the documentation A Description of the Manual Update Packet A Manual Update packet consists of replacement and addition pages which should be incorporated in your manual to bring it up to date Signing Up for the Documentation Update Service Hewlett Packard offers a Documentation Update Service that will provide you with further updates and changes as they become available If you have not received update information that matches the serial number of your instrument you can receive this information through the Update Service If you operate or service instruments with different serial prefixes we strongly recommend that you join this service immediately to ensure that your manual
106. ameters in that mode e The front panel display only changes to show what mode the instrument is in when changing parameters remotely The different parameters that can be changed are not shown as they are being altered To be able to view the parameter changes during HP IB operation you must manually select the menu that shows the parameters you want to look at before sending the HP IB commands 3 18 Model 8904A Operation HP IB Compatibility The following codes denote the various remote control abilities built into the HP 8904A Codes with the not bar over them indicate abilities that are not available in this instrument Refer to the Glossary in the HP IB tutorial for more information on the meaning of these codes SH1 Source Handshake full capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake full capability T6 Talker Basic Talker Serial Poll Talk Only Mode Unaddress if MLA TEO Extended Talker Basic Talker Serial Poll Talk Only Mode Unaddress if MLA L4 Listener Basic Listener Listen Only Mode Unaddressed if MTA LEO Extended Listener Basic Listener Listen Only Mode Unaddressed if MTA SR1 Service Request full capability RL1 Remote Local complete capability PP1 Parallel Poll remote configuration DC1 Device Clear full capability DTO Device Trigger no capability CO Controller no capability HP IB Code Listings for the HP 8904A The following pages contain listings of the HP IB pro
107. ample SEQE115ET Set Sequence End Valid terminator is ET Form SEQP lt Index Value gt ET Example SEQP37ET Set Sequence Index Valid terminator is ET Form WSQ lt Data String gt lt Terminator gt Examples Tone Sequence WSQ01123456789ABCDEF DTMF Sequence WSQ0123456789ABCD Digital Sequence Binary Base WSQ0101010101010101 Digital Sequence Octal Base WSQ0123456701234567 Digital Sequence Hex Base WSQ0123456789ABCDEF Write sequence string Entry string is terminated with crit EOI or the etx character Maximum string length 250 characters Form FRH lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRH723 5HZ Enter tone frequency Tone Sequence Mode only Valid terminators are HZ and KZ 26 rev 01NOV89 Oo Model 8904A l A A L ALL L L AL L AL LA L A LAA L AAA AAA AL L HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language l programming example for the HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER gt OPTION 001 fm stereo composite t7 left channel only R RAEREARRERRARRARRRRKEHREARRREREERRERRAKARERAEKARARERERARRRAERERRERRERER OUTPUT 726 PS GMO 8 O OUTPUT 726 DEAOC1 FRA39KZ APA1VL PHA270DG WFAS OUTPUT 726 DEBOC1 FRB37KZ APB1VL PHB90DG WFBS OUTPUT 726 DEBOC1 FRC19KZ APC 100MV WFCSI OUTPUT 726 DEDOC1 FRD1KZ APD2VL WFDSI END Operation Preset and go to channel configuration mode Set
108. and preemphasis are adjustable Option 002 A second internal channel and output port are added allowing two independent simultaneously operating signals Option 003 The DIGITAL PORT on the rear panel of the instrument allows direct TTL input of control data to perform the following functions Hop Ram Up to 16 phase frequency and amplitude states of channel A may be preset and directly addressed Timing for fast hopping must be provided by an external source rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A General Information Digital Modulation Appropriately setting the 16 direct control registers allows the instrument to be used as a digital modulator Examples of signals which can be generated with this technique include FSK or multilevel FM up to 16 levels BPSK QPSK and QAM Option 005 Up to eight instruments may be connected together to form a master slave relationship between the instruments One instrument provides the timing signals for the other seven If all eight instruments are equipped with Options 002 and 005 a total of 16 outputs can be synchronized If eight instrument have Options 001 and 005 32 internal channels can be synchronized Detailed operating information for this function is provided in the HP 8904A Option 005 supplement in section 3A Option 006 A full floating balanced transformer coupled output is provided for Output 1 Output impedance is 6002 instead of the usual 500 Maximum output level is i
109. anged in Ki eae the same order to help you quickly find the key you want ES vo c kannet o bas dod Aoi u RATA AMEN y T Seb will AT On A INR As RE TR Lh A L Set C aE E Z m a nee kK Ga la AG mia X dl 0 ERE 2 de AEN AS A A A Y P as A AAA 148 pl DESTN Outil a E A ES 7 gt 7 E dara L dRes R RS x amp ae Ne r rare E 4 E 4 S 4 z o 2 2 S T E Z 7 7 E F Er D A A Z Ea H Er M E E tf ot po q E p Z E 5 2 i G Tes X 7 lt LS 7 ee et E IA A A er cre arre lt WN 4 Figure 1 2 The Display Fields and Entry Keys are Similarly Positioned for Quick Access Note If you enter a wrong digit simply press the key to backspace and then re enter the correct digit 4 Enter 120 Hz If your HP 8904A is operating on a 50 Hz power line rather than 60 Hz enter 100 Hz for this demonstration That s all you have to do to enter the frequency you desire for your output signal Table 1 3 shows the frequency ranges provided by your HP 8904A Table 1 3 The Output Frequency Ranges of the HP 8904A 0 0 Hz to 600 kHz 0 0 Hz to 50 kHz Square Triangle Ramp Meet the HP 8904A 1 9 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A ee e Enter an Amplitude 5 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V A 1V peak sinewave should now appear on your oscilloscope display Adjust the oscilloscope s triggering if needed for a stable displa
110. are generated using the same technique that provides channel A The Frequency Phase Amplitude Waveform and Destination of each channel can be individually controlled to produce a combination of modulated and summed signals rev 01NOV89 3 9 Operation Model 8904A Summation You can sum two three or four channels together into a single output You can sum two or three channels together to produce a composite modulation signal for modulating channel A For instance you could use channels B and C to modulate channel A and then sum channel D with the modulated channel A signal Refer to Operating Considerations Summation for additional information Modulation You can use one or more of the three additional channels to modulate channel A Only channel A can be modulated Multiple channels can be summed together to provide composite modulation signals such as those used for FM Stereo broadcasts or VOR Navigation Refer to Operating Considerations Summation for additional information on summing modulating signals External modulation is not provided Sequencing Sequencing allows you to output a sequence of Tone DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency or Digital signals Each of the individual signals in a sequence can be defined to provide very exacting signaling capabilities Sequencing can be set to run continuously or one sequence at a time using manual control Tone Sequencing You can specify up to 16 individual tones creat
111. ations of channel summation are acceptable EXCEPT FOR A C and B D or A D and B C at the same time You may not sum two sets of non adjacent channels However you can sum and output two adjacent channels such as B C and modulate channel A with the non adjacent channel D Abbreviated Specifications Option 001 Abbreviated specifications are listed here to provide general operating guidelines Complete detailed specifications for options 001 to 003 are listed in Section 1 Specifications for Option 005 and above are provided in supplements at the end of this section 3 10 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A Operation Modulation Modulation of channel A only using a sinewave carrier and modulating signal Table 3 2 Option 001 Modulation Capabilities AM 0 Hz to 600 kHz 1 to 100 0 1 of carrier amplitude of carrier amplitude 0 Hz to 600 kHz O Hz to 600 kHz 1 0 1 Hz or 31 digits whichever is less 0 1 or 0 001 radians 0 Hz to 600 kHz 0 up to 179 9 2 per channel DSBSC 0 Hz to 600 kHz OVTO10V 1 FM deviation range Fearrier Faeviation lt 600 kHz 2 M range Foarrier Ene LEY lt 600 kHz 3 Refer to the Operating Technical Reference information later in Section 3 for a detailed explanation of Amplitude Resolution Summation Channel to channel phase accuracy equal amplitude sinewave signals summed into one output 0 1 or 30 ns 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz whichever is greater Maximum
112. azard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal in jury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a haz ard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in dam age to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indi cated conditions are fully understood and met Any interruption of the protective ground ing conductor inside or outside the instru ment or disconnecting the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury Ground ing one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unin tended operation If this instrument is to be energized via an autotransformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earth terminal of the power source Servicing instructions are for use by service trained personnel only To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform any servicing unless qualified to do so Adjustments described in the manual are per formed with power supplied to the instrument
113. be created using an HP 8904A an Application Phase Continuous Stepped Sweep Application Phase continuous stepped sweeping from 100 Hz to 10 kHz Table 3 4 Instrument Settings for Phase Continuous Sweep 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E E Comments 1 The Tone Sequence is 0123456789ABCDEF 2 The Run Mode can be Single or Continuous 5V 3A HP 8904A Option 005 Multi Instrument Phase Synchronization Introduction This document is a supplement to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide and the Operation and Calibration Manual It contains operation and reference information specific to HP 8904As with Option 005 installed This information includes the following e A General Description of the added capabilities available with this option e A description of the Electrical Connections unique to Option 005 equipped instruments e Step by step Detailed Operating Instructions that explain instrument connections and settings for phase synchronizing two or more HP 8904As e A list of HP IB Operation codes specific to Option 005 equipped HP 8904As and a programming example e A complete list of Specifications 3A 2 HP 8904A Option 005 SST aT I I I TIE TS I AO OE EE AINE General Description The HP 8904A Option 005 allows the phase synchronization of two or more HP 8904As equipped with Option 005 Phase synchronization is accomplished by interconne
114. can be Summed and then Output Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 19 Things to As you have seen the HP 8904A s four channels provide you with a wide selection of signal possibilities Figure 2 6 provides an overview Remember about of the HP 8904A s modulation and summation capabilities Four Channel Operation CHANNEL A CHANNEL B OUTPUT 1 Figure 2 6 The Modulation and Summation Capabilities of the HP 8904A 2 20 Modulate or Sum the Signals A A A A A A a A AAA A A A A A A A AAA A A A eae E Key Points Table 2 4 contains operating considerations you should keep in mind about Operation as you configure your output signals Table 2 5 contains the operating ranges for the HP 8904A s modulation capabilities Table 2 4 Operating Considerations for Four Channel Operation e Select the desired destination before setting the amplitude e Channels B C and D can be configured as either modulation sources or output signals but never both e Only Channel A can be modulated e Channels B C and or D can be used to modulate Channel A e Displayed modulation levels are peak the overall deviation is twice the amplitude value shown on the display e The DSB modulation mode sets Channel A s amplitude setting to the DSB amplitude setting e When frequency or phase modulation is being used press the RESET key after entering the deviation value AMPTD to set a zero phase reference for the angle modulation Two thr
115. cation a Y a sine wave Characteristic AC Amplitude 0 1 0 009 dB 1 0 09 dB gt 630 mVpp into 500 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz gt 630 mVpp into 500 100 to 600 kHz Flatness Description The output of the Multifunction Synthesizer in connected directly to a thermal converter The output of the converter which is a dc voltage proportional to the rms input is read on a digital voltmeter A reference is determined with the Multifunction Synthesizer set to 1 kHz at 0 7 Vrms into 500 The frequency is then changed and the deviation from the reference noted This test relies on the flat frequency response of the converter The amount of deviation from the reference level at various frequencies is determined by incrementing the Multifunction Synthesizer s amplitude until the reading is the same as for the reference then noting the total level change required NOTE This test does not verify ac amplitude flatness for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 balanced output Refer to Performance Test 4 for that option However if the instrument has Option 002 and 006 perform the portion of this test for Output 2 Equipment Digital Multimeters iii ri SAA NS Rd HP 3478A Thermal Converter ooo oooooooooomommrrrsornsrs HP 11050A or Ballentine Labs 1395A 1 The thermal converter is susceptible to burnout if more than 1 Vrms is applied to its input Be careful when changing the frequency of the Multifunction
116. ce Sequencing of Tone DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency and Digital signals is provided Option 002 A second channel channel B and a second instrument output port are added The two channels operate independent of each other however the phase relationship between the two signals can be varied by adjusting either channel Option 003 This feature provides the ability to hop between 16 different channel A setups Frequency Amplitude and Phase can all be hopped simultaneously or independently The timing signal and address selection for accomplishing the hopping is input via the Digital Port See Digital Port discussed earlier in this section Operation Model 8904A 3 3 HOW TO CREATE AND OUTPUT A SIGNAL 3 4 Each channel available in your HP 8904A is set to default values each time the instrument is powered up You must specify any signal parameters you need to change in the Channel Configuration Mode before you can output the desired signal To enter the Channel Configuration Mode press the f1 key from the Main Selection Level You can then store the instrument settings you have specified by using the SAVE and RECALL keys to access the storage registers Most of the signal parameters can be entered in any order Destination Frequency Phase Amplitude Destination Amplitude Frequency Phase etc However you should always set the Destination DESTN before specifying the Amplitude AMPTD since the Amplitude setting is a
117. ce length to 750 four bit characters In the binary mode each bit in the sequence is interpreted as a binary number that corresponds to either address 0 or 1 of the Hop RAM Only two signal states can be used in this mode but the maximum sequence length is increased to 3000 bits IT gt AQ AA A AAA A e ee HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements 3C 3 A T A A A A AAA f3 Burst Length The burst length specifies the number of times the sequence will be repeated if the burst mode is used The minimum number is one similar to the Single mode of the other sequence modes the maximum number is 127 WFORM This function allows you to select any one of the six standard waveforms to be output Since this setting defines the waveform for all Hop RAM addresses the waveform type can not be hopped Sequence Editing f1 Seq Index The sequence index indicates where a sequence entry is relative to the entire sequence You can use this function to jump to any place in the sequence for editing purposes In the menu above the sequence index is 1 This indicates that the number 0 is the first number in the sequence If the number 15 was entered for the sequence index the displayed sequence would change so that the 15th character in the sequence E hex would be at the far left of the displayed sequence f2 Seq End The sequence end defines the number of Hop RAM addresses in the sequence 14 Edit Sequence Pressing f4 enables functions that a
118. cies 16 user definable tones each with an individual on time and off time On time duration 0 ms 0 80 ms to 655 35 ms Off time duration 0 ms 0 80 ms to 655 35 ms Zero off time and zero on time not allowed Timing resolution 0 01 ms 10 us Timing accuracy 0 02 ms 20 us Sequence length 750 tones user definable from front panel or HP IB programmable DTMF sequence with Option 001 Number of tone pairs 16 standard DTMF tone pairs 0 9 A D Frequencies per Bell Technical Reference Publication 48005 On time duration 0 ms 1 00 to 655 35 ms Off time duration 0 ms 1 00 to 655 35 ms Zero off time AND zero on time not allowed Timing resolution 0 01 ms 10 us Timing accuracy 1 ms Sequence length 750 DTMF tones user definable from front panel or HP IB programmable rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A General Information Table 1 1 HP 8904A Specifications 3 of 4 Digital Sequence with Option 001 User definable On level 10V open circuit Off level 10V open circuit and period Sequence entry Binary octal or hexidecimal Sequence length Up to 3000 bits Period duration 0 10 ms to 655 35 ms Period resolution 0 01 ms 10 us Period accuracy 0 02 ms 20 us Control modes applies to tone DTMF and digital sequence modes Manual sequence allows stepping through sequence single sequence and continuously repeat sequence Sequence can also be triggered by external T
119. ck light drive for the front panel display utilizes a 100 Vac signal Be careful when working on or near the front panel to avoid touching any exposed wires on the connector to the display 5 3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Each adjustment procedure contains a list of required test equipment The test equipment is identified by callouts in the test setup diagrams where included If substitutions must be made for the specified test equipment refer to Table 1 2 for the minimum specifications It is important that the test equipment meet the critical specifications listed in the table if the Multifunction Synthesizer is to meet its performance requirements 5 4 POST REPAIR TESTS ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKS Table 5 1 lists the performance tests adjustments and checks needed to calibrate or verify calibration of a repaired assembly The tests adjustments and checks are classified by the assembly repaired or replaced Table 5 1 is also useful as a cross reference between performance tests and assemblies when the failure is a specification that is slightly out of limits The Basic Functional Checks mentioned in the table are explained in the introduction to Section 4 Model 8904A Adjustments Table 5 1 Post Repair Tests Adjustments and Checks Assembly Repaired Performance Test Adjustment or Check A1 Keyboard Assembly Basic Functional Checks A2 Controller Assembly A3 Output Assembly A10 Output Assembly Option 002 A4 Power Supply A
120. configurations for various application examples From now on when your application requires a function generator modulation source or stimulus for audio circuit testing you can rely on the HP 8904A to provide the flexibility and accuracy that you need Table 1 6 The Channel A Settings from the Chapter 1 Demonstration Table 1 7 contains operating considerations you should keep in mind as you operate your HP 8904A Tab e Floating ground LED on is the default output setting e The output impedance is 500 whether the Output Port is turned on or off Enter Amplitude e The displayed amplitude value represents peak volts TE o A when the HP 8904A is connected to a high impedance input or peak to peak volts when it is connected to a 502 input Output Noise e The Noise function provides pseudorandom Gaussian white noise e The amplitude value you enter sets the peak output level of the noise Turn Off Special e Special Function settings are turned off when the Functions PRESET key is pressed but not when the MAIN key is pressed Meet the HP 8904A 1 23 A A A a E A A A a es A A E ey To Learn More If your HP 8904A is equipped with Option 01 02 or 03 refer to the remaining chapters to learn more about operating your HP 8904A Table 1 8 Chapter Guide for the Various Configuration Options Option 01 Only Chapters 2 and 3 Options 01 and 02 Chapters 2 3 then 4 Options 01 02 and 03 Chapters 2 3 4 th
121. coupled output Because the transformer output was designed for passing sinewaves only all specifications apply to that waveform The Option 006 output will not pass digital sequences available with Option 001 In addition phase accuracy is degraded and therefore not specified for Option 006 Output type fully floating balanced transformer coupled output Usable output frequency range 30 Hz to 200 kHz AC amplitude sine wave only Range Open circuit 0 to 20 Vrms 6002 load 0 to 10 Vrms 1509 load O to 4 Vrms 500 load 0 to 1 5 Vrms Resolution 31 2 digits Accuracy amplitude gt 40 mVrms into a balanced 6002 load 6 0 5 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 12 1 0 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Flatness amplitude gt 40 mV rms into a balanced 6002 load 1 kHz reference 0 15 dB 0 15 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 0 15 dB 0 75 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Spectral Purity sine wave only THD N including spurs amplitude 140 mVrms to 10 Vrms into a balanced 6002 load 46 dB 0 50 30 Hz to 300 Hz 30 kHz BW amplitude lt 1V_ into a balanced 6002 load 60 dB 0 10 300 Hz to 7 5 kHz 30 kHz BW 63 dB 0 07 7 5 kHz to 20 kHz 80 kHz BW 55 dB 0 18 20 kHz to 100 kHz 750 kHz BW Supplemental Characteristics Balance Typically gt 40 dB 30 Hz to 50 kHz Output Impedance Nominally 6009 at 1 kHz Flatness amplitude gt 40 mV rms into a balanced 6009 load 1 kHz reference 0 15dB 4 0 dB 30 Hz to 200 kHz THD N
122. cting the phase setting signals of each instrument s digital waveform synthesis circuitry in a Master Slave relationship One instrument provides phase reset and clock synchronization signals for the other instruments These signals provide a common phase reference point for up to 16 separately configured channels using eight instruments equipped with options 002 and 005 When SYNCHRONOUS MODE has been enabled the Phase Reset and SYNC Clock signals are re routed to the connectors at the rear of the instrument If an instrument is being used as the Master controller these signals must be routed back into the instrument to function properly These signals are also connected to any Slave instruments for phase synchronization Electrical Connections Four female BNC connectors are used to interconnect the instruments for phase synchronization SYNC CLOCK OUTPUT This connection provides an output for the internal clock signal used for latching internal waveform and amplitude data into the analog to digital converters It provides the Master synchronizing signal for connecting two or more HP 8904As for phase synchronization This signal is not used when the instrument is configured as a Slave SYNC CLOCK INPUT The SYNC CLOCK OUTPUT signal is input here to provide the clock signal for latching the waveform and amplitude data into the analog to digital converters If the instrument is configured as the Master controller its own SY
123. ctual phase resolution of the hardware is better than the 0 1 degree limit A 12 bit word is used in the Digital Waveform Synthesis IC to set the phase of each channel Since the phase range is 0 to 359 9 degrees each bit in the twelve bit phase word represents a phase increment of 0 08789063 degrees Since the resulting phase resolution from the digital process is not an exact value the instrument firmware limits the resolution to 0 1 degrees The HP 8904A attempts to set the phase as close as possible to the requested value using the available phase resolution This means that for any given phase offset there will be a predictable error caused by the non exact phase resolution of the hardware In any case the maximum value of the error due to the resolution can be mathematically shown to be one half of the hardware resolution 0 04394531 degrees Although the phase resolution is 0 1 degrees there are some cases where the phase resolution can be degraded Sinewaves and triangle waves always have 0 1 degrees of phase resolution at all frequencies However the ramp and squarewave waveforms can have reduced phase resolution at certain frequencies These special frequencies are EXACT sub multiples of the digital to analog converter clock rate of o 1 6777216 MHz These are the frequencies where the squarewave has no jitter and the ramp waveform has greatly reduced jitter Refer to the Jitter information discussed earlier in this section Example fr
124. cumentation Updating lt 2 3 4 48 A Ae Ra Se ERE Ee dt EE SS 1 10 Seral NUMDES us sr dal SA A A as Hh eS es e wee eS ears ew 1 10 A Description of the Manual Update Packet 00000 eevee eens 1 10 Signing Up for the Documentation Update Service 00200 ee ee ee eee 1 10 Section 2 Installation Introduction a AER dai E AE ra sos da 2 1 Minal Inspection 3 6 a E A A AAA dl e Be wk as Sd 2 1 Preparation For USO aiii di de a ca o li See dia ds 2 1 Line Voltage Selection and Fuse Replacement 2 2 Power Cables sa asis o ae la e e Soh a a a cd ea we a 2 2 HP IB Address Selection 6 26 5 a ads a dde dd a a 2 2 INTer connection sas did ai EAS a a di we eh ee 2 4 Mating Connectors inca a a a a ir a a es 2 4 Operating Environment a 6 R 456k bd oe A A ds A E a ii aE R Se 2 4 Bench Operation pena SS ad da AO R L 2 4 Rack NOTRE E do e a e a y Oe SE ari ee e dos ica E 2 4 Storage And SNDE 6 rad a ic Ge ie a ae ws SOS Eee a E id 2 4 Environm veses sb SE ERE E ORR ERS EO CRS SSS ESO a 2 4 Pack nica sd a Re Si a cs dh ae da a da das 2 4 rev 01NOV89 Volume 1 Contents Model 8904A Section 3 Operation TIO T ss pun a Sd pg Aes eee aa a es ie e loba 3 1 Block e AER 3 2 Functional Block Descriptions 2 000 ce eee eee ee he ewe eee 3 3 How to Create and Output a Signal 0 0 eee ee eee ee eee ne 3 4 Instrument Functions and Operating Considerations 0000 eee eee eee nee
125. d the features included with different instrument configurations and options and an overview of special operating considerations for each case Abbreviated specifications are also included for quick reference A detailed list of all specifications is provided in Section 1 Detailed operating examples are given in the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide Standard Instrument Creating a Simple Signal From Digital Data HASE WAVEFORM AMPL ITUDE ADJUST DATA TABLE DATA FREQ DATA eH ee y G AMPL I TUDE ASSEM om TE PA anta is DIGITAL WAVEFORM SYNTHESIS FILTER CONTROL SAMPLER SAMPLER AUDIO DESTINATION ATTEN 2 OUTPUT 1 AMPL AMPLIFIER CONT TEE ON OFF 0 HI Y L a K Ha A BR ATTEN 1 OVER v NEH o VOLTAGE Y AMPLIFIER PROTECTION FLOAT CONTROL Figure 3 3 Creating A Simple Signal 3 6 Model 8904A Operation How the HP 8904A Generates a Signal Waveforms are generated by a numerical synthesis technique The heart of the synthesizer is a single digital waveform synthesis integrated circuit DWSIC For each channel the DWSIC generates a continuous stream of numbers which represent instantaneous levels of the waveform These digital values are then converted to an analog signal by a digital to analog converter or DAC one converter for each output port The analog signal is conditioned by conventional analog circuitry and routed to the output connector The conditioning circuits inc
126. de accepts the values 0 9 0 Channel Configuration Mode 1 Reserved for future options 2 Tone Sequence Mode 3 DTMF Sequence Mode 4 Digital Sequence Mode 5 9 Reserved for future options This function will return a three digit ASCII string representing the Error Number 000 to 255 where 0 means no error reported Refer to Appendix B for the list of Help Messages Read the ID message A read of the ID string sends 80 characters to the requesting controller in the following format HP8904A Opts 01 02 03 Firmware Revision XXXXXa Serial No XXXXX Form lt Parameter gt IS lt Value gt Example APA1VL increment set Used for any parameter that can be modified by the Up and Down commands Increment Set Increment Down Examples PHAUP UPDNDN DN UP and DN can be used for settings which have an associated increment set value They can be prefixed by a specific function or used by themselves to modify the presently active function Use like the LAST key to access the previous display Use like the NEXT key to access the next display Form OO lt Output Number gt lt ON or OF gt Example OO10OF Output On Off Control Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired state HP IB Codes C 3 Table C 1 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8
127. demonstrations contained in this chapter before referring to the remaining chapters no matter which Configuration Options you have The operating information provided in this chapter is important to all HP 8904A configurations If you are now sitting comfortably in front of your HP 8904A you are ready to begin Start on the next page and follow the step by step guide to learning to operate your HP 8904A You will soon discover how the HP 8904A can provide you with both the flexibility and precision needed for many signal source applications Meet the HP 8904A 1 5 A I a a Key Features and _ Major Attractions This chapter contains demonstrations that will help you learn how to e Output a Signal e Control the Output Port e Save and Recall Your HP 8904A Settings e Turn on the HP 8904A s Special Functions Set Up Your Equipment Connect your HP 8904A to an oscilloscope as shown above Adjust Your Oscilloscope Dispara isos a anne A VOlS DIVISION ave a DION COUPE cesiones de High Impedance Time Division 2 202 6Gtead aad Pekar its S TUS O Ra Cannel as 1 6 Meet the HP 8904A MEAT AE E A SI ETE Note You will find that the back lighting for the HP 8904A s display is designed to automatically turn off after approximately three minutes if no keys are pressed The display will light when you press any key Select Chassis Ground 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the PRESET key DS 2 Press the blue SHIFT key and
128. e 7 Press the 11 224 Ease softkey twice so that E it appears in the display The HP 8904A allows you to select between a Hexadecimal Binary or Octal base numbering system for formatting your Digital Sequence T TTT 3 16 Output a Sequence of Signals Specify the Sequence Order POR o e ME CT OCA rpe OEI errr TIRE m r RNS Select the Run Mode C ed Na 8 Press the NEXT key to access the Sequence String display This display allows you to define the order of your On and Off bits where binary 1 On and 0 Off loaa1ae1aa0111 Ta Sequence 9 Press the 14 Edit Sequere softkey 10 Press the 1 and 0 keys to configure a bit sequence of 101101001 11 Press the amp key once to position the cursor underneath the last 1 you entered and press the blue SHIFT key and the END key 12 Press the NEXT key to access the Run Mode display Output a Sequence of Signals 3 17 Things to You have now completed the setup procedures for each of the three Signal Sequence Modes Tone DTMF and Digital The following Remember outline lists the key steps for setting up a signal sequence Figure 3 9 About the Signal illustrates the HP 8904A s Signal Sequencing capabilities Sequence Modes 1 Enter the parameters for each signal you wish to include in your sequence 2 Specify the order in which you wish for the signals to be output 3 Select the method you desire for outputting the seque
129. e this number does not exist in that numbering system Command not permitted in this mode Command not available in present window Destination Control Errors Channe A cannot be used as a source for AM FM DSB Phase or Pulse modulation Channel A can be modulated but it cannot be used as a modulation source Channe A has a Waveform of dc and cannot be modulated A channel which has a Waveform of dc cannot be used as a modulation source An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist AM and DSB are mutually exclusive modulations and one is already active An attempt was made to use a second summer For this configuration of two summers only channels A B with channels C D is permitted The Hop Ram is presently enabled as this modulation source The Frequency set value selected is greater than the permitted maximum for pulse modulation B 4 Help Messages Table B 1 Error Numbers and Description Listings for the HP 8904A s Help Messages 4 of 4 The Frequency set value selected is greater than the permitted maximum for this waveform Either AM or DSB modulation is active so Amplitude Hop Ram cannot be changed The present value of the Hop Ram amplitude settings will exceed the maximum permitted value and therefore the Amplitude Hop Ram cannot be turned on The present value of the Hop Ram frequency settings will exceed the maximum permitted value and therefore the Frequency Hop Ram cannot be tu
130. e Accuracy whichever is higher 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz sine wave Description Channel A and Channel B of the Multifunction Synthesizer are nominally set to the same amplitude but with 180 deg phase difference The two channels are summed together internally so that the two signals in effect cancel each other The output is viewed on an oscilloscope The amplitude of Channel B is fine adjusted to null the signal as much as possible The phase of Channel B is fine adjusted also to further null the signal The amount of phase shift required to null the signal is the phase error between the two channels NOTE For instruments with Option 002 a second output and 006 balanced output channel to channel phase accuracy is specified only for Output 2 For instruments with Option 006 but not Option 002 channel to channel phase accuracy is not specified Equipment OscilOSCODG s acia AA ee E N A HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Procedure 1 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the oscilloscope s de coupled high impedance input NOTE For instruments with Option 002 and 006 connect the oscilloscope to OUTPUTS 2 HIGH rather than OUTPUTS 1 HIGH in the step above 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 10 kHz AMPTD 1 V NEXT FREQ 10 kHz 4 30 Performance Test 9 TE TT Model 8904A Performance Tests SHIFT DEST
131. e da BOSSES 4 eA eR o ew eS 3 42 Menu Map lt N ia ROE AGE eS Wen eee a bee ee lee hae eee 3 44 Selectino Mendo a a A ci ans ee Ta 3 44 Menu Changes When Using HP IB Control 3 44 rev 01INOV89 Model 8904A Volume 1 Contents Hop RAM Sequencing a A di ia aa tia e OO a a 3C 1 General Description core cese di ee teh o R Ed pis ee RA 3C 1 Detailed Operation 56 r 2 2064 A a an ol OO Se ke AA AA 3C 1 HP IB Operation 3c aos Dan cd O SUS amp ds aa i e a di eS ES 3C 5 FM Stereo Composite Generator 0 00 cee ee ee a a 3C 7 General DESCEDUOD ii adas AA Swe LAA A eS 3C 7 Detailed Operation sc ss ss Id a a ia R R R A a a R cas Oe GS a ee SS rd 3C 7 HP IB Operation 2 44 A a E A Oe E E N 3C 10 Multi Instrument Phase Synchronization 00 eee eee ee ee eee ee eee 3A 1 Introduction sushi in id A a ia ida ide SS 3A 1 General Description lt dada AA aa A isa ee Ne 3A 2 Bl ctrical Connections ao Gast A Se RARAS awe ei ee ee OO ea N R 3A 2 Detailed Operating Instructions eee eee a 3A 3 HPB ODO ass ai e eh ne Bd Se e a a ta cis 3A 7 DDECINCALIONS gt i o a a di ad e ed IR OE 3A 8 High Power Balanced Output 20 aaa ee ee eee 3B 1 Introduction errar dl ad Bec Ube 8 ae ee ok GE eS oe AL da 3B 1 General Description R es ee H a ae ee 3B 1 Operating Considerations 0 0 0 ce eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 3B 1 HP 8904A Option 006 Specifications
132. e prefixed by a specific function or used by themselves to modify the presently active function Use like the LAST key to access the previous display Use like the NEXT key to access the next display Form OO lt Output Number gt lt ON or OF gt Example O0O10F Output On Off Control Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired state 3 21 Operation Model 8904A Table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 3 of 5 Form PH lt Channel gt lt Phase Value gt lt Terminator gt Example PHA45DG Set phase of a channel Valid terminators are DG and RD Phase Reset PR Phase reset establishes a common zero phase reference for the channels Output 726FRA 3 22 Query Form Query Data 7 Example Enter 726 Freq_a_value ASCII Data FRx 0000000 0 APx 00 000000 APx 00 000000 APx 00 000000 APx 0000000 0 APx 0000000 0 APx 0000000 0 APx 00000000 PHx 0000 0 WFx 00000 DEx 00000 Waveform 00001 Sine 00002 Ramp 00003 Triangle 00004 Dc 00005 Noise 00006 Square Retum Value Where x is the channel number A D implied Units Hz Volts Volts Volts Percent Hz Degrees Degrees See Return Value See Return Value Return Value 00007 00008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00016 Destination N A Out1 4 Dsb Out1 4 DC Out1 4 DC Am Fm Phase Mod Pulse Mod N A N A D
133. eZ 3 18 Programming Considerations 0 cee ee ee ee ee eee 3 18 HP IB Companbility 53 44 4 lt 2 4454S BSG oe PS e bee bee ees 3 19 HP IB Code Listings for the HP 8904A 3 19 Status Byte A E A A ee 3 31 General IniormaiOn ie bdo ri is Be a aio ra Soe ic daba 3 31 Using the Status Byte ses dsc la GS rd des OR da e 3 31 Error SOLA COM dia foe ns Bee RS OE A e E ek Bd ds dE A ad 3 32 Error Codes and Help Messages 20 2 cece ee a 3 34 Special Funcion ces peda aR ee EE BG rd E AA ok T kG 3 37 INTTOQUCIION ua o a A a Sib ee a T A ios a 3 37 Special 0 Last State Recalled on Power Up 000 eee ee ee ee ee eee 3 87 Special 1 Disable Automatic Phase Reset 2 0000 ce eee eee ee eeee 3 37 Special 2 Disable Beeper ems a a ke Pew ive e od oe ee EE Bee da 3 37 Special 3 Reverse Modulating Waveforms 00 0 ee eee eee eee neues 3 37 Special 4 Disable Output Blanking e 3 38 Special 5 Floating Outputs on Power Up e 3 38 Special 6 Enable Synchronous mode 20 eee ee a eee 3 38 Special 7 Configure as Master Controller o cee ee ee ee te eee 3 38 Operating Technical Reference 2 2 2 cee eee ee ee ee eee 3 39 WaVe lO LJ IGEOE yura al di eR e amp Se R E A ee BEES Ea 3 39 Fine Amplitude Resolution 2 2 0 ee ee ee ee 3 39 A E E E E A 3 41 Phase Resol onr a a E NM ee Se eee 3 42 Phase Continuous Switching eii da
134. eads the special function status to verify they 40 have been set It then configures channel A of each 50 instrument The two signals are then phased synchronized 60 OUTPUT 726 PS Preset HP 8904A 1 MASTER controller 70 OUTPUT 725 PS l Preset HP 8904A 2 Slave 80 OUTPUT 726 SF192 Enable synchronous mode and enable this 90 instrument as the MASTER controller ASCII equiv bit 7 amp 8 100 OUTPUT 725 SF64 Enable synchronous mode only ASCII equiv bit 7 110 OUTPUT 726 RSF Read special function settings from HP 8904A 1 120 ENTER 726 A 130 PRINT Master controller special functions A 140 OUTPUT 725 RSF Read special function setting from HP 8904A 2 150 ENTER 725 B 160 PRINT Slave instrument special functions B 170 OUTPUT 726 GMO FRA1KZ APA1VL WFASI Set MASTER CHAN A 1 Volt Sine Wave 180 OUTPUT 725 GM0 FRA1KHZ APA1VL WFAS Set Slave CHAN A 1 Volt Sine Wave 190 OUTPUT 726 PR Phase reset the MASTER Controller to phase synchronize 200 both instruments Specifications Unit to Unit Phase Accuracy Additional 30 ns error 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Total phase error between units is then the greater of 0 1 deg or 60 ns 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Maximum Number of Synchronized Units Eight 8 units using low loss power splitters for a total of 16 phase related channels if all units have options 002 and 005 Recommended Power Splitters lt 4 units synchronized Mini Circuits T
135. ecimal are valid Sequence index value entered is out of range Valid Range is 1 250 Sequence End value entered is out of range Valid Range is 1 250 The number entered is not valid in the Sequence Base selected Either the Binary Octal or Hexadecimal base numbering system is used to specify the Sequence Index and Sequence End For example you may not use the character 9 when you have previously specified the Octal base since this number does not exist in that numbering system Command not permitted in this mode Command not available in present window Destination Control Errors Channel A cannot be used as a source for AM FM DSB Phase or Pulse modulation Channel A can be modulated but it cannot be used as a modulation source Channel A has a Waveform of dc and cannot be modulated A channel which has a Waveform of dc cannot be used as a modulation source An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist 3 39 Operation Model 8904A Table 3 9 Error Numbers and Description Listings for the HP 8904A s Help Messages 3 of 3 Description AM and DSB are mutually exclusive modulations and one is already active An attempt was made to use a second summer For this configuration of two summers only channels A B with channels C D is permitted The Hop Ram is presently enabled as this modulation source The Frequency set value selected is greater than the permitted maximum for pulse
136. ecisely controlled and can be altered by adjusting the Phase of either channel Operating Considerations Option 002 Destination Control Option 002 does not allow you to change the Destination of the two channels Channel A is always designated for Output 1 Channel B is always designated for Output 2 See note above Abbreviated Specifications Option 002 The specifications for channel B are identical to those of channel A listed in Section 1 Output 1 to Output 2 phase accuracy sine waves at the same frequency 0 1 or 30 ns 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz whichever is greater Model 8904A Operation Option 003 Frequency Amplitude and Phase Hopping Operating Tutorial e HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Operation and Application guide HP part 5953 8491 Contains detailed operating instructions for accessing the HOP Ram menu and specifying all of the parameters to be hopped AMPTD AMPTD HOP RAM CHANNEL A ADDRESS OUTPUT 4 SELECTION CONF I GURATION AMPTD AMPTD P ADRS SELEC Suit AORE SELECTION REMOTE HOP CONTROL MANUAL HOP CONTROL HP 1B HOP RAM TION DIGITAL PORT HOP RAM ADRS SELECTION FOR FAST HOPPING Figure 3 5 HP 8904A Option 003 Hopping Between 16 Channel A Settings How Hopping is Performed Option 003 allows you to define 16 different channel A frequency phase and amplitude configurations and store them in the Hop Ram section of memory You can then tell the HP 8904A which configuration yo
137. eck the relative delay between test points A2TP1 on the two Multifunction Synthesizers The delay difference should be less than 15 ns If this test passes check for a channel to channel or Output 1 to Output 2 phase accuracy problem Equipment OBE OSOE aiii chee erie wie aed R HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Power Splitter Four Way adas bond hese nee a Mini Circuits ZSC 4 3 Probe 2 reau CO Me is ida ADO HP 10434A Procedure Initial Setup 1 Remove the instrument s top cover The cover may be tightly secured in the groove of the bottom cover If the top cover does not pull off easily after backing out the screw on the rear edge back out the screw on the rear edge of the bottom cover also 2 Connect the equipment as follows a On the Multifunction Synthesizer connect the rear panel SYNC CLOCK OUTPUT to the the input of the power splitter Connect the rear panel SYNC CLOCK INPUT to one of the outputs of the splitter Use short cables Terminate the other splitter outputs with 509 loads A 6 dB pad can be substituted for the splitter b Connect test point A2TP1 to channel A of the de coupled oscilloscope using a low capacitance divide by 10 probe Refer to Figure 5 5B for A2 assembly component locations Adjustment 7 rev 0O1JUL91 Model 8904A Adjustments NOTE To minimize ringing on the signal pulses use low capacitance divide by ten probes Test points A2TP6 and TP7 are provided for convenient grounding of the probes
138. ed to transfer the full 3000 bits in three write sequence string commands If binary base is used it will require up to 12 transfers of 250 bits to send the full 3000 bits A programming example is shown below for sending a binary sequence of 3000 bits to the HP 8904A s Function Mnemonic Form Example Function Mnemonic Form Example u Function Mnemonic Form Example Function Mnemonic Form Example u Function Example m Function Example Function Example a Function Example a Function Example a Function Example a Function Example a Function Example m Function Example a Function Example a Function Example m Function Example Set waveform to be hopped RWF RWF followed by wave type Valid wave types are SI RA TR DC NS and SQ RWF SI or RWFNS Set manual sequence pointer MANP MANP followed by value 1 750 for hex output hase 1 3000 for binary output base then ET Value must be less than the sequence end value MANP 1 ET or MANP3000ET Set sequence pointer SEQP SEQP followed by value then ET Value has same restrictions as MANP function SEQP 37 ET Set sequence end SEQE SEQE followed by value then ET Value cam range from 1 to 750 for hex output base and 1 3000 for binary o
139. ee 17 Hold the 2 key down to return to the first position in the sequence string Seq Index 1 18 Press the f4 Edit Sequence softkey The Edit function allows you to create the sequence string you desire by deleting and inserting Tone Registers 19 Press the 7 key to position the cursor underneath the Tone Register 4 entry within the brackets Notice that when you are using the Edit function the Seq Index value increments when you press the 1 key to reflect the cursor s current position in the string 20 Press the 14 Lnzer t softkey and enter 2 1 0 21 Press the f4 Inser t softkey again to turn off Insert and then press the 9 key once to position the cursor under the 0 Tone Register that you just entered eo ee 22 Press the blue SHIFT key and the END key You have now created en A a seven step sequence 0123210 using the four tones that you Ree configured PAE goe e PE ara pare Ak lt lt AUNAR eo bt y cae dN GA prrs 3 8 Output a Sequence of Signals Select the Run Mode 23 Press the NEXT key to access the Run Mode display 1 Manual 24 Press the AMPTD key and enter 5V The output amplitude of each tone in your sequence will be 5 Vpk into a high impedance input or 5 Vpp into a 502 input 25 Press the f1 f anu a l softkey to access the Manual Step mode 26 Press the 7 key to step through the Tone Sequence you have set up Note that the value shown in brackets in the display is the number of t
140. ee or four channels may be summed into a single output Two or three channels may be summed for modulating Channel A for example Destn AM for Channels B C and D All combinations of channels are acceptable except for combinations that do not allow the HP 8904A to control the four channels A B C and D in sequence For example you can not AM Channel A with D and sum Channels B and C Instead simply AM Channel A with B and sum Channels C and D e Saves the current parameter settings for all four channels Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 21 A AAA A A A A AA A A A A A A A A A A ee e Table 2 5 HP 8904A Modulation Ranges 1 When using a sinewave 2 Per channel with a total of 539 7 3 Double Sideband 2 22 Modulate or Sum the Signals How to Set Up Some Applications FM Stereo Composite Signal The following application examples show some of the waveforms that you can create using the HP 8904A s Four Channel operating capabilities E Ea U ARDAIN an ID Application Testing FM Stereo Receivers Table 2 6 Instrument sica for the FM Stereo Wer aa Signal Pe pan fom per es oe me ee oven om epee ER CIN 2 et vw CIN Comments 1 Adjust the amplitude of Channel D to vary the pilot signal level 2 DSB is Double Sideband Suppressed Carrier AM Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 23 A A A A AAA AA An A A A A A A ey VOR Composite Signal Applicat
141. elationship 68 47 Therefore the fast edges of the square or ramp waveforms and the peaks of the triangle wave do not always align with the clock The result of this is that an occasional fast transition occurs one DAC cycle before or after the correct time This causes a maximum jitter of 600 ns Unlike other types of jitter the jitter produced by the HP 8904A does not occur on every cycle and the severity of the jitter is predictable by calculating how far from a perfect frequency relationship a particular waveform is from the clock frequency If we chose a different frequency such as 23 3 kHz the jitter will be almost zero because the frequency relationship is nearly integral 72 005 Since this frequency is harmonically related to the clock frequency the fast edges almost always coincide with the output clock of the DAC All sampled synthesizers have this jitter For the HP 8904A all waveforms have this jitter except sinewaves of course DC and noise do not either The sinewave has no instantaneous transitions and therefore has no jitter In addition the trigger outputs both the polarity and zero crossing outputs from the Digital Port will always have jitter again depending on the frequency selected even if the waveform being produced is a sinewave Fine Amplitude Resolution The HP 8904A appears to have 33 digits of available resolution when viewed from the front panel However the available resolution is much better than what is
142. en 5 Options 01 and 03 Chapters 2 3 then 5 Option 02 Only Chapter 4 Options 02 and 03 Chapters 4 and 5 Option 03 Only Chapter 5 Modulate or Sum the Signals Operation In This Chapter This chapter will help you learn to use the four channels provided by Configuration Option 01 If your HP 8904A is equipped with Option 01 simply step through the following demonstrations to learn how to e Modulate Channel A Set Up Simultaneous Modulation Sum the Modulation Signals e Sum the Output Signals e Set Up Some Multi Channel Applications Set Up Your Equipment Connect your HP 8904A to the oscilloscope as shown above 2 2 Modulate or Sum the Signals a A A E OIDO T A A A A EE TE EET Access the Four Channels Adjust Your Oscilloscope Display AAA dae Channel A VOMS DIVISION yerani onda as 1V COUPE iaa Ra E E 9 d da dc High Impedance TME DIVISION A a 0 2 ms TAG SCP TTT Channel A Select Chassis Ground 5 Press the blue SHIFT key and the PRESET key on your HP 8904A Press the blue SHIFT key and then the FLOAT key Press the 1 key and then the OFF key to reference the HP 8904A s circuit ground to chassis ground at Output 1 Note that the FLOAT LED for Output 1 is now off Adjust the oscilloscope s trace position if necessary to center scale Press the f1 Channel Config softkey 6 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel A Configuration display 148 pu DESTH Citi Modulate
143. equencies are 26 214 4 Hz 13 107 2 Hz 6 553 6 Hz 3 276 8 Hz 1 638 4 Hz 819 2 Hz and 409 6 Hz The phase resolution at these frequencies is limited because the nearly instantaneous transitions in these waveforms can only occur at the clock rate For example at 26 412 4 Hz one degree of phase equals 105 169 ns of time Time for 1 degree 161134 Hax360degress 105 169 ns However the DAC clock can change its output every 5115 mg 595 046 ns This means that for the phase to change at all the phase must be moved 5 66751 degrees In other words the phase must be advanced enough so that the transition portion of the waveform can move forward or backward to the next DAC clock This effect reduction in phase resolution is reduced by one half for each successive exact frequency which is lower in frequency This effect of reducing the phase resolution does not effect square or ramp waves at other frequencies because the jitter present averages out the switching point of the fast transitions and therefore allows small changes in phase This process is analogous to the use of dithering with noise in digital to analog converters Phase Continuous Switching In the Channel Configuration Mode the HP 8904A does not normally provide phase continuous frequency or amplitude switching In normal operation the HP 8904A performs a phase reset whenever the frequency or destination of any of the four channels is changed This is done to assure that
144. equency Span kHz 1 07 300 1 29 300 2 21 500 9 Reconnect the two jumpers to their original positions inductor to Adjust A3L8 or A10L8 A3L9 or A10L9 A3L7 or A10L7 10 Perform Adjustment 5 Sine X X Compensation Adjustment 4 5 9 Adjustments Model 8904A REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 2 SOO 000 DOU Z 10 OOOdBm 18 00096 MAG CA 80 254dBm Pi T ft tt O Pu tT A S piu pT O O Pf tpt te tt vib S SO E S E START 0 GO0RZ STOP 5 000 000 DUD Z AMPTD 10 OdBm Figure 5 2 Typical Filter Response from 0 to 5 MHz 5 10 Adjustment 4 a ee ees a a R Model 8904A Adjustments Adjustment 5 SINE X X COMPENSATION Description The output of the Multifunction Synthesizer in connected directly to a thermal converter The output of the converter a de voltage proportional to the rms input is read on a digital voltmeter A reference is determined with the Multifunction Synthesizer set to 1 kHz at 0 7 Vrms into 500 The frequency is then changed to 550 kHz and the Sine X X Compensation is adjusted for the same reading as at 1 kHz The adjustment is made to the A3 or A10 Output Assembly If the instrument has only one Output Assembly A3 the adjustments are made only to it If the instrument has Option 002 with two Output Assemblies A3 and A10 adjustments are made to one or both assemblies Accessing A3 will require extra disassembly If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output adjustmen
145. equipped with four channels Option 01 Channel A can be hopped while it is being modulated or summed with other signals except that the amplitude setting cannot be hopped when AM or DSB modulation is selected and the phase setting cannot be hopped when M is selected Hop Mode cannot be used in conjunction with any of the three Signal Sequence Modes provided by Option 01 If your HP 8904A has Dua Output Ports Option 02 Channel A can be hopped at one Output Port while another signal is being output at the other output port The HP 8904A can be fast hopped at switching speeds of up to 8 us using the rear panel DIGITAL PORT Fast hopping requires an external address selection source The HP 8904A can be hopped over its HP IB at switching speeds of up to 8 ms Installation Unpack Your HP 8904A Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material inside is stressed keep them until you have checked the shipment for completeness and proper operation If components are missing from your shipment or if there is mechanical damage or defect notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container or cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping materials for inspection by the carrier Connect Power Warning The HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer requires a power source of
146. es In all instances measures must be taken to prevent static charge build up on work surfaces and persons handling the devices For further information on ESD precautions refer to SPECIAL HANDLING CONSIDERATIONS FOR STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES in Section VIII Service Section Model 8904A Volume 1 Contents VOLUME 1 CONTENTS Section 1 General Information OOG 3 diae di ds e as a da ari lao o le apa do dl 1 1 Safety Considerations 00 0 cee ee e ee ee ek ee ee ee 1 2 o AAA A AR 1 2 Specifications gt ais a a RO E E NN 1 3 Y A O E A RN 1 7 Mechanical and Document Options and Accessories 00 ce eee ecu eee neues 1 7 Electrical Options s re a eho decent de amp ASIA hee eee ae bo ee we nd ew 1 8 ODOM OU tr N tse Ae aia nh tie Be es ts Hh a ee De ete E eo i ad aida 1 8 Bl a mein Oates ee er A A as Me ok Se E Sa Se Se we Dee 1 8 OOM OO Bix sed ts ae ee He Ge i doe Ne eg Ee ee eB Se a en Gt es 1 8 ODEON 000 ed fro i E Qe ie Hk ce Ee es hie es a e dd re rk ee deis 1 9 Option 006 sa a a iol a Sh Bed ad ade rd is a Se e ee es ele a sh eS 1 9 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus 2 20 L 1 9 Compatibility Grigor aoe R is iss tits Bs eB fee Ge ess Coe es Wa Aas Gee ee rar Rien ae es ed ta 1 9 Selecting the HP IB Address 0 2 0 00 cee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 1 9 Accessories Supplied erei ee wee el we es Sa ek T OR L A E oO le oh oe ee 1 9 Recommended Test Equipment 1 10 Do
147. estination Am Fm Phase Mod Dsb Pulse Mod Out Out2 Off rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A Operation Table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 4 of 5 Description Recall Form RC lt Register gt Example RC11 Recall Valid data values for Recall are 0 11 Reverse Power A Reset reverse power protection Save Form SV lt Register gt Example SVT Save Valid data values for Save are 0 11 Service Request Form RM Read Service Request Mask The present value of the SRQ mask in ASCII is returned 000 191 Form SM lt Data Value gt Examples SM128 SMO Set Service Request Mask Valid data 0 255 Special SF Form SF lt Data Value gt Functions Examples SF4 SF17 Set or Reset Special Functions The value of the Special Function flag can be read at any time but can only be set at the Main Selection Level The flag is a composite of bit flags A Special Function operation configures all 16 bits of the flag that is any previously set flags are lost Do not leave a space between the mnemonic and the data value Example To activate Special Functions 1 and 2 the command would be SF6 Speciali value 2 Special2 value 4 6 RSF Form RSF Read Special Function Value The returned value is the decimal representation of a 16 bit binary number indicating the Special Function s that are active Value range 00000 to 65535 in ASCII is returned Special Flag Bi
148. estination and amplitude for a signal and there appears to be no signal present on the output check to see that you have specified the correct ground reference for your application Waveform Jitter Due to the digital conversion process used to create the different waveforms in the HP 8904A a partial waveform can be present when using a ramp square or triangle waveform This type of distortion is referred to as jitter This affect can be seen by displaying a 48 kHz square wave on an oscilloscope The high low transition period appears to have a second offset trace For more information on what causes this affect refer to the Operating Technical Reference Waveform Jitter information included later in Section 3 3 7 Operation Model 8904A Abbreviated Channel A Specifications Abbreviated specifications are listed here to provide general operating guidelines Complete detailed specifications for all instrument options are listed in Section 1 Table 3 1 Standard Instrument Capabilities Wave Frequency Frequency Phase Phase Amplitude Amplitude Form Range Resolution Range Resolution Range Resolution N 0 Hz to 600 kHz 0 1 Hz 359 9 or 0 1 or 0 to 10 V p p 31 digits 6 282 rad 0 001 rad 502 load A 0 Hz to 50 kHz 0 1 Hz 359 9 or 0 19 or 2 0to10YV p p 31 digits 6 282 rad 0 001 rad 502 load N 0 Hz to 50 kHz 0 1 Hz 359 9 or 0 1 or 2 Oto 10V p p 31 2 digits 6 282 rad 0 001 rad 500 load PLU 0 Hz to 50 kHz 359 9 o
149. ests Model 8904A 3 Set the reference synthesizer s frequency to exactly 1 MHz and its amplitude to 0 7 Vrms 1 Vpk 10 dBm into 501 4 Switch the oscilloscope to the X vs Y display mode Set the vertical sensitivity of each input to 100 mV per division 5 Set the frequency of the two synthesizers as indicated in the following table For each setting perform the following steps a Adjust the phase of the reference synthesizer until the front and back traces of the Lissajous pattern coincide b On the Multifunction Synthesizer press PHASE then press the f key 19 times and observe the alignment of the waves of the resulting Lissajous pattern each time The worst case misalignment should be within the limits indicated in the table NOTE To determine the alignment limits momentarily set the phase increment of the Multifunction Synthesizer to 0 1 deg press Q observe the misalignment which equals 0 1 deg then press 3 0 1 deg is the instrument s smallest phase increment 0 05 deg must be extrapolated from the observed 0 1 deg increment Remember to set the phase increment back to 18 deg after this check The vertical gain of the X axis input can be set to 50 mV per division to increase the alignment resolution if the signal does not overdrive the oscilloscope s input amplifier Also perform this test quickly to reduce the effects of phase drift in the oscilloscope s amplifiers E l Mi lt Limi Reference S
150. ey You Function 0 have turned on Special Function 0 Notice Status now equals On in the display to let you know that Special Function 0 is now turned on Special Function 0 enables the HP 8904A to power up to the operating settings that existed when power was turned off 4 Press the NEXT key to step through the other Special Functions Note that the Special number in the display increments each time you press the NEXT key A brief description is displayed for each Special Function that is provided by your instrument 5 Press the f4 E 1 t softkey to return to the Main Selection Level display Now Try Special Function 0 6 Press the f Channel Lont 1g softkey and the NEXT key to access the Channel A Configuration display again 7 Now switch the white LINE key off for a few seconds and then back on Your HP 8904A should power back up to the same state 1t was in Meet the HP 8904A 1 21 Main versus Preset Save Registers are Retained Special Functions are Turned Off The HP 8904A always provides you with at least two methods for returning its operation to the Main Selection Level 1t is important that you are aware of the effects that each of these methods has on the status of the HP 8904A s settings 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the PRESET key Both the MAIN key and the PRESET key return you to the Main Selection Level The PRESET key however resets the HP 8904A s functions to their pre defined p
151. ey to access the Channel Configuration Mode ection Level MAIN owr x r Channel Configuration Hode Press NERTALAST keys f4 Exit och A FREQ ch Bi FREQ PHASE D 0 deg 148 pt 149 pu DESTH Out2 1866 0 Hz AMPTE 1990 9 Hz AMPT NEUEN Sine le 4 Y 1 Figure 4 2 How to Access Option 02 Dual Output Ports Operation 4 4 Output Two Signals at Once AA A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Output Port 1 Output Port 2 2 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel A Configuration display Notice that the destination for Channel A is already set to Output 1 1309 pl DESTH Out Q Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V 4 Press the WAVEFORM key and then L key to output a square wave from Channel A at Output Port 1 5 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel B Configuration display Notice that the destination for Channel B is already set to Output 2 6 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V 7 Press the WAVEFORM key and then the 1 key to select a ramp waveform Two signals should now appear on the oscilloscope display a square wave and a ramp wave How to Vary the Phase Output Two Signals at Once 4 5 The HP 8904A gives you precise control of the phase relationship between the two function generators to 0 1 degrees 1 Press the PHASE key the INCR SET key and enter 45 degrees 2 Press the 7 key to increment the phase of Cha
152. ff at 200 kHz Filter Selection In normal operation the HP8904A automatically selects one of the two filters based on the waveforms and frequencies used The elliptic sharp cutoff filter is used for sinewaves and noise and any time a frequency gt 50 kHz is output The gaussian low overshoot filter is used for triangle square and ramp waveforms and for pulse modulation The elliptic filter can cause considerable ringing on transient waveforms However the gaussian filter does not cause ringing 3 41 Operation Model 8904A Although the automatic filter selection algorithm normally picks the optimum filter there are cases where you may want to manually pick one of the two filters For example you may want to limit the bandwidth of the noise waveform By using the gaussian filter the noise bandwidth can be lowered from 600 kHz to 200 kHz Manual selection of filters is accomplished by pressing the FILTER key and then entering the output number you are using 1 for standard instruments 1 or 2 for Option 002 equipped instruments When the output number is entered the filter that is presently active for that output is displayed You can then use the f1 key to select the other filter and enable or disable the automatic filter selection function if desired Phase Resolution The nominal phase resolution for the HP 8904A is 0 1 degrees This is the smallest increment which can be entered from the front panel or over HP IB The a
153. for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 4 of 4 Terminators Time Base Waveform 10 20 50 40 50 60 70 73 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Milliseconds Kilohertz Hertz Degrees Radians Volts Millivolts Microvolts Enter Seconds Percent Percent Example EO Read External Reference Status Ths function allows you to determine whether the Time Base reference is external or internal If the External reference is on a 001 is returned if not a 000 is returned WF Form WF lt Channel gt lt Waveform gt Example WFATR Set waveform of a channel Valid data values for waveform are SI Sine RA Ramp TR Triangle SQ Square NS Noise DC dc RRE ARA E E A E ER ELE A A HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language 1 programming example for the I standard HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER HARE ER REN AA ER E A ER ER E E EA YE OUTPUT 726 PS Preset HP 83044 OUTPUT 726 6MQ Goto channel configuration mode OUTPUT 726 FC10F Turn output 1 float off OUTPUT 726 FRA1000 1HZ i Set channel A frequency to 1000 1 Hz OUTPUT 726 APA1 25UL Set channel A amplitude to 1 25 U OUTPUT 726 PHA9IODG Set channel A phase to 90 degrees OUTPUT 726 WFARA Set channel A waveform to ramp END Figure C 1 Sample Program for Configuring Channel A HP IB Codes C 5 Table C 2 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used With Option 01 Instrument
154. ge This product is designed for use in Installation Category IT and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and IEC 664 respectively FOR INDOOR USE ONLY This product has autoranging line voltage input be sure the supply voltage is within the specified range Regulatory Information Updated March 1999 To prevent electrical shock disconnect instrument from mains line before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean internally Ventilation Requirements When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Product Markings CE the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community A CE mark accompanied by a year indicated the year the design was proven CSA the CSA mark is a registered trademark ofthe Canadian Standards Association d Chapter 1 CERTIFICATION Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standard
155. gister 1 Press the FREQ key and enter 10 kHz Press the AMPTD key and enter 3V Hop Register 2 8 9 10 Press the f1 Hop Fam Adr softkey the 2 key and then the ENTER key You can access the various Hop Registers by using either the or 2 keys or by entering the number of the desired register directly Press the FREQ key and enter 15 kHz Press the AMPTD key and enter 4V Hop Register 3 11 12 Press the f1 Hop Fam Adr softkey and the t key to access Hop Register 3 Enter a frequency of 20 kHz and an amplitude of 5V You have now entered frequency and amplitude parameters into four Hop Registers 0 through 3 Table 5 1 Parameter Entries for Hop Registers 0 through 3 5 6 Hop the Output Signal Save and Recall Your Hop Parameters Remember Specify the Hop Parameters The HP 8904A will reset the contents of all of its Hop Registers to their default values 0 when it exits the Channel Configuration Mode to return to the Main Selection Level When you set up your own Hop Mode applications you can easily retain all of the hop parameters that you have entered by storing them in a Save Register When you set up a Save Register as described in Chapter 1 of this guide the HP 8904A will store the current parameter settings for all of its Hop Registers as well as all of the current settings for Channel A When you Recall a Save Register the HP 8904A returns all of its operating m
156. gramming codes for the HP 8904A The codes are arranged in four tables The first table Table 3 5 contains the HP IB codes for the functions that are standard to all HP 8904A configurations Tables 3 5 through 3 7 contain the commands that are unique to each of the Configuration Options 001 002 and 003 A sample program is presented after each table to demonstrate the use of the codes Note The HP IB code listings and programming examples for options after Option 003 are provided in the individual option supplements at the end of this chapter rev 01NOV89 3 19 Operation Model 8904A Table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 1 of 5 HP IB Code Description AP Form AP lt Channel gt lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt Example APA1VL Set amplitude of a channel Valid terminators for amplitude are VL MV and UV Amplitude Backlight BO Backlight On BE Backlight Off Form EM Exit Mode Exit Mode needs no data Returns instrument to Main Selection Level Beep Filter FS Form FS lt Output Number gt lt Filter gt Example FS1AU Output Board Filter Select Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 followed by no space the desired filter SH Eliptic Sharp Cutoff LO Gaussian Low Overshoot AU Auto Automatic Form FC lt Output Number gt lt ON or OF gt Example FC1ON Float Output On Off Control Designate Output Port 1 or 2 if
157. ground must be provided from the main power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set SAFETY SYMBOLS AN Indicates instrument damage can occur if indicated operating limits are exceeded A Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates earth ground terminal WARNING A WARNING note denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION A CAUTION note denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operation procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond an CAUTION note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory Information Updated March 1999 Safety Considerations for this Instrument WARNING Chapter 1 This product is a Safety Class I instrument provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Whenever it is likely that the protection
158. has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation If this instrument is to be energized via an auto transformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earth terminal of the power source If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only No operator serviceable parts in this product Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that my remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply For Continued protection against fire hazard replace the line fuse s only with 250 V fuse s or the same current rating and type for example normal blow or time delay Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product dama
159. hat DZ B now appears in the amplitude field in the display to inform you that Channel A s output amplitude has been set suppressed by the DSB modulation ASE DESTH Ontl 12 Press the WAVEFORM key and the 4 N LU and NOISE keys You can select any of these waveforms for the carrier signal Hik HHH u ait Bin t LEETE ETRURIA TETI LIIT EN VET TIN Mil 1 Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 9 A A A A A TTT A A A A E DN AA 13 Press the key 14 Press the NEXT key the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and the AM key 15 Press the AMPTD key and enter 90 16 Press the LAST key Notice that Channel A s amplitude setting has now been changed from the 2 5V you originally set to the 3V DSB setting Remember When the DSB modulation mode ts selected the amplitude of the carrier Channel A is determined by the DSB amplitude setting As you can see the HP 8904A offers you a wide selection of carrier and single source modulation possibilities Figure 2 2 illustrates these possibilities CHANNEL B C yi D OUTPUT 1 Figure 2 2 The HP 8904A Offers a Wide Selection of Modulation Possibilities 2 10 Modulate or Sum the Signals How to Set Up Simultaneous Modulation Note Simultaneous modulation occurs when multiple modulation modes are applied to a single carrier The HP 8904A makes it easy to simultaneously modulate Channel A using the five modulation modes AM FM M
160. hat the information in this memory is not lost if power is disconnected from the instrument Hop RAM Registers This is the area of RAM where the 16 Hop RAM settings are stored for Option 003 equipped instruments Digital Port The Digital Port connector on the rear panel of the HP 8904A is used primarily for address selection and timing of the Hop RAM settings Fast hopping is achieved by using an external timing signal The usage of this connector is discussed later in Section 3 along with more details on using Option 003 Keyboard All of the front panel controls HP IB This is the connector for the IEEE 488 compatible Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Except for the Line switch all functions that can be selected using the front panel controls can be selected remotely over this control bus Refer to the Remote Control information described later in Section 3 for more information regarding the use of this connection Example programs for using the HP IB are also provided Standard Single Channel This block contains the one standard channel included with every instrument channel A You can control the Frequency Phase Amplitude and Waveform of the signal Option 001 Three more channels are added You may sum channels together in various combinations Refer to the Option 001 Specifications listed in Section 1 for more information on summation Modulation of channel A is provided using one or more of the other channels as a modulating sour
161. he Service Mask to change the settings for your needs 3 31 Operation Model 8904A Reading the Service Mask To read the current Service Mask setting simply use the HP IB command RM to return the weighted value A simple program for reading the Service Mask is as follows 10 OUTPUT 726 RM 20 ENTER 726 A 30 PRINT SERVICE MASK VALUE A 40 END Setting the Service Mask To set the Service Mask to define the SRQ generating condition you want active use the HP IB command SM along with the weighted value For example if you wanted to set the Service Mask to only allow an interrupt if a reverse power condition occurs you would output the command OUTPUT 726 SM16 Error isolation 3 32 Any time an interrupt occurs you can press the HELP key on the front of the HP 8904A to display a brief description of the error or use the HP IB command HP to read the error number A list of Error Codes is provided in this section to help you isolate any hardware software or operation faults that occur If you are writing a program that responds to an SRQ condition you must first enable the interrupt for your controller and then perform a serial poll to return the Status Byte value You can then use this value to interpret the condition of the HP 8904A and generate whatever response to the condition you want The following programming example is given to help you understand how to retrieve Status Byte information Model 8904A
162. he T or Y keys The display does not change however until enough steps have occurred to alter the 34 digits of displayed resolution lH T Model 8904A Operation Filters Since the HP 8904A generates waveforms as digital words a low pass filter must be used to reconstruct the waveform to remove the high frequency energy that is present The Nyquist Theorem states that to fully recreate a waveform the sampling rate must be twice the highest frequency component in the waveform The HP 8904A samples at 1 67 MHz and allows frequencies up to 600 kHz This is a ratio of 2 783 1 allowing a margin for Nyquist s required 2 1 The digital output contains the spectrum shown in the following drawing HP 8984A NORMAL OPERATING RANGE ELLIPTIC FILTER RESPONSE mets RESPONSE SIGNALS GENERATED BY SAMPLING LU O gt E Ped l a lt 1 7MHZ 1 7MHZ SAMPLING RATE 2 2 1 67MHZ 1 67 6 1 67 6 2 KHZ 688KH2 1 2MHZ FREQUENCY Figure 3 14 Spectrum of Signals Created by the HP 8904A A filter must be used to remove the high frequency images grouped around the sampling frequency and its harmonics In the HP 8904A there are two filters used for this purpose an elliptic filter and a gaussian filter e The elliptic filter has excellent flatness with a 3 dB cutoff at 670 kHz and a very steep cutoff slope e The gaussian filter has excellent group delay linearity but has a gentle cutoff slope and a 3 dB cuto
163. he Tone Register currently being output The number to the left of the brackets is the sequence position number of that Tone Register 27 Press the f2 Cant ilmucus softkey This causes the HP 8904A to continuously cycle through your Tone Sequence Adjust the oscilloscope triggering if necessary to get a stable display 28 Press the f4 t oF softkey and then the f3 gt 1 na L softkey to output a single pass of the Tone Sequence Output a Sequence of Signals 3 9 Save and Recall Your Sequence Remember The HP 8904A will reset the contents of all of its Tone Registers to their default settings when it exits the Tone Sequence Mode to return to the Main Selection Level When you set up your own signal sequences you can easily retain all of the parameters you have entered by storing them in a Save Register When you set up a Save Register as described in Chapter 1 of this guide the HP 8904A will store all of the settings for all of its Tone Registers as well as all of its other current operating conditions When you Recall a Save Register the HP 8904A returns all of its operating modes to the same settings that existed when the Save Register was selected This completes the Tone Sequence demonstration If you wish to try setting up a different sequence order for the signals you have configured simply press the LAST key to return to the Sequence String display and use the Insert and Delete Editing functions to arrange
164. he instruments is critical HP 8904A SLAVE 1 RESET SYNC CLOCK INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT HP8904A MASTER Controlier amp RESET SYNC CLOCK INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT POWER SPLITTERS 150 mm o HP 8904A SLAVE 2 RESET SYNC CLOCK INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT Figure 3A 1 Connecting Cables and Power Splitters for Phase Synchronization 3A 4 HP 89044 Option 005 A A A A AAA AAA A A A ee ee E Accessing the Required Menu Settings Two instrument settings are required to phase synchronize multiple HP 8904As both settings are in the the Special menu These are the specials 1 Special 6 Enable Synchronous Mode and 2 Special 7 Configure As MASTER Controller Enable Synchronous Mode allows you to enable or disable the Option 005 capabilities Configure as MASTER Controller defines whether the instrument will be a Master or Slave when using Option 005 capabilities Only one instrument may be configured to be the Master controller To access these specials from the Main Selection Level menu press these keys SHIFT SPECIAL 6 ENTER Press NEXT to access Special 7 The following figure illustrates these steps Off f4 Exit on POWER UP Figure 3A 2 Accessing the Phase Synchronization Special Functions HP 89044 Option 005 3A 5 A A _ A A AAA AA A A A A a S A E All instruments that are to be phase synchronized must have Special Function 6 enabled
165. he on and off times specified must be modified so that the switching will occur at a zero crossing 3 43 A AEAEE Operation Model 8904A 3 11 MENU MAP The Menu Map illustrates the various menus for all options of the HP 8904A It is intended to help you familiarize yourself with the organization of the menus and the steps required to perform each function Different menus are accessed by using the keys in the DISPLAY area of the front panel Selecting Menus The Channel Configuration and Sequence menus are accessed by using combinations of the f1 f3 and NEXT keys Different levels of each menu are selected using the NEXT LAST keys You can always return the instrument to the Main Menu level by using the SHIFT and MAIN keys Menu Changes When Using HP 1B Control If you are using remote control via the HP IB the menu on the display only reflects the mode the instrument is in and does not show the values for each field being changed For example if the controller tells the instrument to go to mode 0 by using the command GMO the instrument displays the Channel Configuration Mode menu but does not change as you specify parameters for the different channels To look at the parameters as they are being changed you must manually select the affected menu 3 44 ft Special 6 f2 Status Off f4 Exit 0 Last state recalled on power up 1 Disable automatic phase reset 2 Disable beeper 5 Reverse
166. he sample size to 1000 d Set the display rate to maximum e Set the input impedance to 502 input attenuation to 1 and input coupling to DC f Set the trigger slope for a positive going edge g Adjust the input trigger level to OV 4 Set the frequency of both Multifunction Synthesizers as indicated in the following table For each setting perform the following steps a On the test Multifunction Synthesizer key in PHASE 0 deg b Press the set reference key on the counter that is press the set reference key of the statistics functions c On the test Multifunction Synthesizer key in the phase as indicated in the table The time interval on the counter display should be within the limits given in the table Performance Test 8 4 27 Performance Tests Model 8904A NOTE If the time interval is negative set the phase of the reference multifunction synthesizer to 180 deg or if it already is at 180 deg set it to 0 deg Repeat the steps for that frequency The sample size may be varied to produce the most readable time interval in the shortest time Time interval Limits ns PHASE 1 deg PHASE 10 deg PHASE 100 deg lele s sw ow tow om Ow 100 000 2 776 4 10 000 27 764 1 000 277 640 100 2 776 400 NOTE This concludes the test if the instrument does not have Option 002 Output 2 5 Set up the equipment as in step 1 except connect the test Multifunction Synthesizer s OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output to
167. he testpoint on the low output The testpoint has a resistor in series with it to prevent the oscilloscope from unbalancing the amplifier Equipment Oscilloscope ii AS Raa ghee cee eee eee AA HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Procedure 2 Remove the instrument s bottom cover If the instrument has Option 002 a second output assembly and Output 1 the output from the A3 Output Assembly is to be adjusted move the A10 Output Assembly out of the way Refer to the disassembly procedure in Figure 5 4 If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output disconnect the coax cable from A3J400 OUTPUT HIGH at the front edge of the A3 assembly In the steps that follows when a reference is made to the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH connector make the connection to A3J400 instead Connect the oscilloscope s ac coupled vertical input to ASTP402 or A10T P402 FLT LO on the Multifunction Synthesizer The oscilloscope should have a low capacitance 10 1 divider probe On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in For A3 Output Assembly For A10 Output Assembly f1 Channel Config f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT NEXT FREQ 100 kHz FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 40 mV AMPTD 40 mV Set the oscilloscope to measure the 100 kHz signal Adjust A3C425 or A10C425 HIGH FREQUENCY BALANCE for minimum 100 kHz signal on the oscilloscope but less than 50 mVpp after accounting for the 10 1 division by the probe Use a no
168. hecks Performance Test 5 Spectral Purity Except Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 6 Spectral Purity Output 1 with Option 006 Basic Functional Checks Adjustment 6 Display Backlighting and Contrast Basic Functional Checks Performance Test 4 AC Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness Output 1 with Option 006 Adjustment 3 Output Gain Option 006 5 3 a A A A A A A o Adjustments Model 8904A Adjustment 1 OUTPUT GAIN AND OFFSET Description Four adjustments are made to the A3 or A10 Output Assemblies If the instrument has only one Output Assembly A3 the adjustments are made only to it If the instrument has Option 002 with two Output Assemblies A3 and A10 adjustments are made to one or both assemblies Accessing A3 will require extra disassembly If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output adjustments are made on the A3 assembly with the balance transformer disconnected The four adjustments are made as follows 1 The DAC range is calibrated at maximum ac output 10 Vpp 2 The dc offset of the Audio Amplifier is adjusted for 0 Vdc 3 The dc offset of the Floating Output Amplifier is adjusted for 0 Vdc 4 The DAC range is again calibrated but at maximum dc output 10 Vdc Equipment Digital Vomer td ISR detec gate nate A HP 3478A Procedure Setup 1 Remove the instrument s bottom cover 2 If the instrument has Option 002 a second output assembly and Output 1 the output from the A3
169. hin specifications This concludes the test if the instrument does not have Option 002 4 12 Performance Test 3 Model 8904A Performance Tests Output 2 7 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in SHIFT SPECIAL NEXT f2 Status ON NEXT NEXT NEXT f2 Status ON f4 Exit f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF AMPTD 2 V INCR SET 2 mV 8 Connect the ac input of the thermal converter to the Multifunction Synthesizer s OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output Connect the dc output of the thermal converter to the input of the voltmeter Refer to Figure 4 2 9 Read the voltage and record it for future reference as was done in step 3 1 kHz Reference ________ mVdc 10 On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the frequency as indicated in the following table as was done in step 4 For each setting perform the following steps a On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 2 V again b Note the dc voltage on the voltmeter c On the Multifunction Synthesizer press the 7 or D keys as needed to bring the dc voltage to the level noted in step 9 Keep track of the number of increments required to do this Number of increments 20 100 1 000 10 000 50 000 100 000 200 000 600 000 11 For frequencies of 20 Hz to 100 kHz in the table of step 10 compute the largest difference in number of increments The absolute value of this difference should be 2 increments or le
170. ifferent instruments at one time It uses common TTL level signals for 8 data lines and 8 interface and communication management lines A description of the HP IB connector is provided at the end of Section 2 of this manual The HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer can be remotely controlled via the HP IB to perform any function that can be done with the front panel keys with the exception of turning line power on or off and reading or setting the HP IB address The HP IB address is read and changed by using the ADRS key Valid addresses are 00 to 30 Tutorial e Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP part number 5952 0156 This very helpful guide explains the capabilities and specifications for understanding and using HP IB control Hardware setup interface circuitry and programming are discussed in detail It is written to both the experienced and inexperienced user Programming Considerations e HP IB programs examples in this manual are written in HP BASIC language e This manual is not intended to teach BASIC language programming The tables and programming examples that follow assume that you have enough programming experience to understand and apply the information given in them e Some parameters must be specified before others such as specifying the correct destination for a signal before setting its amplitude and entering the proper mode for the type of signal you need before attempting to set any signal par
171. igital Sequence Only Valid terminitors are MS and SC C 6 HP IB Codes Table C 2 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used With Option 01 Instruments 2 of 2 Form HRA lt 1 or 2 Digit Address gt ET Examples HRA2ET HRA15ET Enter Tone or DTMF Register Addresses 0 15 are valid Valid terminator is ET Register Number Run Mode Run Continuously Run Manually Run Single Stop Run Form SEQE lt Sequence End Value gt ET Example SEQE115ET Set Sequence End Valid terminator is ET Sequence End Form SEQP lt index Value gt ET Example SEQP37ET Set Sequence Index Valid terminator is ET Sequence index Form WSQ lt Data String gt lt Terminator gt Examples Tone Sequence WSQ01123456789ABCDEF DTMF Sequence WSQ0123456789ABCD Digital Sequence Binary Base WSQ0101010101010101 Digital Sequence Octal Base WSQ0123456701234567 Digital Sequence Hex Base WSQ0123456789ABCDEF Sequence String Write sequence string Entry string is terminated with Grit EOI or the etx character Form FRH lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRH723 5HZ Enter tone frequency Tone Sequence Mode only Valid terminators are HZ and KZ Tone Frequency HP 1B Codes C 7 pana E A A A RE TET 10 KARA ERRE RECERCAR 20 HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language o 30 programming example for the e 40
172. ignal on the oscilloscope as was done in step 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press PHASE then press the or D keys a few times to locate the null of the 100 kHz signal The null should occur between 179 0 and 181 0 deg At 100 kHz 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 179 0 ________ 181 0 deg Performance Test 10 4 33 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 11 UNIT TO UNIT PHASE ACCURACY OPTION 005 Specification Option 005 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Unit to Unit Phase Accuracy 0 1 deg or 60 ns whichever is higher Description Two Multifunction Synthesizers are synchronized together one as the master and the other as a slave Output 1 of each synthesizer is nominally set to the same amplitude but with 180 deg phase difference The two outputs are summed together so that the two signals in effect cancel each other The summed signal is viewed on an oscilloscope The amplitude of reference synthesizer is fine adjusted to null the signal as much as possible The phase is then fine adjusted to further null the signal The amount of phase shift required to null the signal is the phase error between the two instrument outputs Equipment OSCIIOSCODE camisa a HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Multifunction Synthesizer reference e m2 HP 8904A Option 005 Power Splitter Four Way 2 required o ooooooommorcrrrrmo mn Mini Circuits ZSC 4 3 SPLITTER UNDE
173. ing a sequence of up to 750 tones You can adjust the order of the tones to appear in any sequence The Frequency On Time and Off Time of each tone can be individually set DTMF Sequencing The DTMF signals are the same as those used for tone type telephone communications Sixteen different DTMF signals are available for creating a sequence of up to 750 tones You can adjust the order of the tones to appear in any sequence The On Time and Off time of each tone can be individually set Digital Sequencing Digital sequencing allows you to specify a series of digital on off values to be output The Sequence Base Period On Level and Off Level are adjustable Sequences of up to 3000 bits values may be specified Hop RAM Sequencing Hop RAM sequencing offers a combination of the capabilities of tone and digital sequence modes Sixteen signal states can be preset each with an associated amplitude frequency and phase value Sequences of up to 750 tones can be output if all sixteen output states Hexadecimal are used Sequences of up to 3000 tones can be output if only two output states Binary are used FM Stereo The FM Stereo composite generator mode allows the user to test FM broadcast stereo receivers All of the associated FM stereo signal parameters are adjustable for maximum flexibility Operating Considerations Option 001 Summation Summation may be done using many combinations of signal output and modulation schemes All combin
174. ing table Also set the low pass filter on the audio analyzer as listed For each setting the distortion read on the audio analyzer should be within the limits shown 4 21 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 7 PHASE ACCURACY USING AN OSCILLOSCOPE Specification Phase sine wave Range O to 359 9 deg Accuracy 0 05 deg relative to O deg for a fixed frequency 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Description The timebase reference of a synthesized signal generator is slaved to the timebase reference of the Multifunction Synthesizer The frequency of the reference synthesizer is set to exactly 10 times the frequency of the Multifunction Synthesizer The synthesizer outputs are connected to the X and Y inputs of an oscilloscope The phase of the reference synthesizer is adjusted so that the Lissajous pattern generated on the oscilloscope display aligns with itself The phase of the Multichannel Synthesizer is then stepped in 18 deg increments and the alignment of the pattern is checked for each step NOTE Phase accuracy for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 balanced output is not specified However if the instrument has Option 002 and 006 perform the portion of this test for Output 2 An alternate test for verifying phase accuracy is given in Performance Test 8 Phase Accuracy Using a Time Interval Counter Equipment OstuUloscope sessions bee eee a AG eae Ewa aa HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Synthesized Signal Generator 26c
175. ing what the data was related to The key selected does not correspond to the function selected Invalid HP IB address entry Only 00 30 decimal are valid entries The Q or 3 key cannot be used with this function The instrument cannot access the output board that connects to the OUTPUTS 1 connector Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem A hardware error was detected by the power up checks Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem The reference loop of the Digital Synthesis A2 assembly is out of lock Refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual to isolate the problem B 2 Help Messages a A A A 16 _ The Special Function display can only be accessed from the Main Selection Level 13 A reverse power error was detected on an output board Disconnect the affected output from any external equipment and re enter the key sequence that originally resulted in the error If an error is still detected by the instrument a reverse power problem still exists 14 _ The recalled Save Register does not contain a SAVE setting 15 The selected function cannot be performed in the present mode For example the FREQ function cannot be executed directly from the Main Selection Level 17 An invalid Special Function number was entered Only Special Functions 0 15 decimal may be entered 18 The Special Function number input was too large for the instrument to recognize
176. io analyzer to measure distortion in dB On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the amplitude and frequency as listed in the following table as was done in step 3 Also set the low pass filter on the audio analyzer as listed For each setting the distortion read on the audio analyzer should be within the limits shown 4 18 Performance Test 5 Model 8904A Performance Tests Multifunction Synthesizer Settings Distortion Limits dB 10 20 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 Analyzer Low Pass Filter kHz 20 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 1 On an HP 8903B a 750 kHz low pass filter is selected when the other low pass filters are off Performance Test 5 4 19 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 6 SPECTRAL PURITY OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Specification Spectral Purity Option 006 sine wave including spurs amplitude 0 14 to 10 Vrms into a balanced 60022 load THD N 46 dBc 0 56 30 to 300 Hz 30 kHz BW amplitude 1 Vrms 60 dBc 0 10 0 3 to 7 5 kHz 30 kHz BW 63 dBc 0 07 7 5 to 20 kHz 80 kHz BW 55 dBc 0 18 20 to 100 kHz 750 kHz BW Description The total harmonic distortion plus noise THD N is measured directly by a distortion analyzer The distortion analyzer removes the fundamental with a notch filter and measures the signal out of the notch filter and the total input signal into the notch filter THD N is the ratio of these t
177. ion VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range Navigation Radio Testing Table 2 7 Instrument e for the VOR G S Comments 1 Adjust the phase of Channel C to vary the bearing The phase accuracy of the HP 8904A is typically 0 05 deg 2 24 Modulate or Sum the Signals Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Train Application Where required duty cycle is not 50 Table 2 8 Instrument Settings for a Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Train Comments 1 Adjust the phase of Channel B to vary the duty cycle for example 90 deg 50 2 Channel C provides a variable dc reference optional Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 25 a cr O A SA A ee A Oe Phase Continuous Sweep G CS NE ES HC Sa E IA E HE ARTE G G E T E S SUEZ E EC ZE ES TS E E E MOOD IT MOU UU UV eV IN VU UN UU Alc lh R DATA Application Frequency Response Testing Comments 1 Adjust the frequency of Channel B to vary the sweep time for example 100 Hz 10 ms sweep 2 Adjust the amplitude of Channel B to vary the sweep bandwidth from 5 kHz to 15 kHz in this example Output a Sequence of Signals In This Chapter This chapter contains demonstrations of the Signal Sequencing Modes provided by Configuration Option 01 If your HP 8904A is equipped with Option 01 complete the following demonstrations to learn how to e Output a Tone Sequence e Output a DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Sequence e Output a Digital Sequence e Set U
178. is kept current For more information refer to the Documentation Update Service reply card included in this manual or contact Hewlett Packard Company Learning Products Department 24001 E Mission TAF C 34 Spokane WA 99220 509 921 4001 Also if you join the update service you can indicate whether you choose to be contacted in the future about the quality of the documentation you receive We are trying to improve the documentation we provide and periodically survey customers as to their expectations of the manuals rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A General Information Table 1 2 Recommended Test Equipment 1 of 2 instrument ie ne Suggested Type Critical Specifications Model Audio Fundamental Frequency Range 20 Hz to 100 kHz HP 8903B Analyzer Distortion Range 70 dB Distortion Accuracy 2 dB Low Pass Filters 30 and 80 kHz HP 3561A or HP 3580A HP 3478A P A HP 5314A HP 3577A HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 Audio Spectrum Frequency Range 100 to 5000 Hz Input Level 5 Vrms Display Range 60 dB Analyzer Digital Multimeter DC Range 0 to 50V DC Accuracy 0 2 1 to 15 Vdc 2 mV 10 to 1000 mVdc AC Range 0 to 100V AC Accuracy 1 Ohms Range 0 to 1 KQ Ohms Accuracy 0 2 Frequency Range 10 MHz Absolute Accuracy 5 ppm Frequency Counter Network Analyzer Analyzer Frequency Range 0 to 5 MHz Display Range 80 dB Source Frequency Range
179. is set to 0 These outputs are only valid in the Channel Configuration mode Operation 3 16 Model 8904A Polarity Outputs These TTL signals identify the polarity of the associated channel s waveform The output is high for phases of 0 to 180 and low for 180 to 360 These outputs are available with all instrument configurations regardless of what options are present in your instrument NOTE Changing the Phase setting of the signal to be output alters the phase relationship between the signal and its corresponding polarity signal Polarity signal transitions are only exactly aligned with the signal being output when the Phase is set to 0 These outputs are used in the Channel Configuration mode only Circuit Gnd This is the same as chassis ground Hop Register Address These four connections are used to specify Hop Ram address for fast hopping channel A s frequency phase and amplitude Option 003 only Once you have accessed the Hop Menu and set the desired Hop Ram parameters for each address you can output the signal for each address by turning the Digital Port ON and then setting the appropriate address on these connections As each Hop Ram address is set on these pins the corresponding channel A configuration is output There is a delay between the time the address is set on the Digital Port and the time the signal appears at the instrument s output This delay is typically lt 8 us The maximum
180. ital Sequence Off Level Form DAPH lt Amplitude gt lt Terminator gt Examples DAPH4VL DAPL 1VL Digital Sequence Mode amplitude terminators are VL MV and UV Digital BSB Select Binary Base Sequence Base BSO Select Octal Base BSH Select Hexadecimal Base Off Time STOF Form STOF lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example STOF 5SC Set Off Time Tone and DTMF Sequence Valid terminators are MS and SC On Time STON Form STON lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example STON9 3MS Set On Time Tone and DTMF Sequence Valid terminators are MS and SC Period Form SBP lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example SBP9 3MS Set Period Digital Sequence Only Valid terminators are MS and SC 1 Option 001 capabilities have been expanded in instruments with serial prefix 2948A and above Refer to section 3 for information concerning the Hop RAM sequence and FM Stereo functions rev 01NOV89 3 25 Operation Model 8904A Table 3 5 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used With Option 001 Instruments 2 of 2 HP IB Code Description Register HRA Number Form HRA lt 1 or 2 Digit Address gt ET Examples HRA2ET HRA15ET Enter Tone or DTMF register Addresses 0 15 are valid Valid terminator is ET Run Continuously Run Manually Run Single Stop Run Sequence End ie Sequence T Tone Frequency FRH Form SEQE lt Sequence End Value gt ET Ex
181. key to access the Sequence String display This display allows you to define the order in which you wish to output the tones you have setup fi Seq Index 2 Seq End 250 You can arrange your tones in sequence strings that include up to 250 steps The bracketed field in the upper right corner of the display shows the first 16 tones of the HP 8904A s default sequence string The default string is a 250 step sequence that repeatedly cycles through the 16 Tone Registers 0 through F Step Through the Sequence String 16 Press the fl 23 rides key and the 9 key to increment the index value Notice that the Tone Registers shown within the brackets scroll to the left each time the 9 key is pressed allowing you to view the rest of the tones in the sequence string The Seq Index value helps you keep track of where you are as you step through the sequence string by displaying the position number of the first left most tone currently shown in the bracketed field Figure 3 3 illustrates the windowing effect of the bracketed field and the relationship between the sequence string position numbers and Sequence Index value Displayed in Brackets p Sequence String 0 1 2 3456789 AB CDE F 01212 4 Position Number 1 2 3 B 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 4 L Seg Index Value Figure 3 3 Relationship Between the Sequence String Position Numbers and Seq Index Value Output a Sequence of Signals 3 7 A a a A A A A
182. l 2 Continuous 3 Single f4 Stop Figure 3 7 How to Access the Digital Sequence Mode 3 Press the NEXT key to access the Digital Configuration display This display allows you to specify the On Level Off Level and Period for your digital bits Output a Sequence of Signals 3 15 Note In this demonstration we assume active high logic by setting the On Level to correspond to the desired logic level for the 1 bits 4V and the Off Level to correspond to the desired logic level for the 0 bits 0 5V You can also configure a Digital Sequence for active low level logic by entering the desired low level as the On Level and the desired high level as the Off Level Simply keep in mind that the On Level setting always determines the output level for the 1 bits in your sequence string and the Off Level always determines the level for the 0 bits Enter the On Level and the Off Level 4 Press the f2 Un Lew softkey and enter 4V 5 Press the f4 UT Le softkey and enter 0 5V Note on the oscilloscope display that the HP 8904A s output signal level is now set to the Off Level that you entered 0 5V Enter the Period 6 Press the 3 Fer i agd softkey and enter 1 ms The period of each 1 Bit and each 0 Bit in your sequence will now be 1 ms LAN a LEVEL SERS SG G GE PID H OE n SE AU EE O SM AEE O in n A IO EAS ER ia ia E ES 0 BIT Figure 3 8 1 and 0 Bit Characteristics Select the Base You Desir
183. l numbers prefixed 2712A and all MAJOR changes that apply to your instrument rev 01JUL91 For additional important information about serial numbers refer to INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL in Section 1 Third Edition This material may be reproduced by or for the U S Government pursuant to the Copyright License un der the clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 APR 1988 Copyright HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 1989 EAST 24001 MISSION AVENUE TAF C 34 SPOKANE WASHINGTON U S A 99220 Operation and Calibration Manual HP Part 08904 90007 Other Documents Availiable Operation and Application Guide HP Part 08904 90006 Service Manual HP Part 08904 90008 Microfiche Operation Calibration Manual HP Part 08904 90019 Printed in U S A September 1992 L HEWLETT PE PACKARD 1 Regulatory Information Updated March 1999 Regulatory Information Updated March 1999 Safety Considerations GENERAL This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition SAFETY EARTH GROUND A uninterruptible safety earth
184. line on the oscilloscope display The instrument waveform is then set to a sinusoid with the same peak level as the dc reference NOTE This test does not verify ac amplitude accuracy for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 balanced output Refer to Performance Test 4 for that option However if the instrument has Option 002 and 006 perform the dc and ac amplitude accuracy portions of this test for Output 2 Equipment Digital Multimeter e id as data aa HP 3478A Oscilloscopi votes dira gt tice ee HP 17404 or Tektronix 2235 4 4 Performance Test 2 Model 8904A Performance Tests HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION OSCILLOSCOPE SYNTHESIZER DIGITAL MULTIMETER OUTPUTS 1 HIGH Figure 4 1 AC and DC Amplitude Accuracy Performance Test Setup Procedure DC Amplitude Accuracy Output 1 NOTE If the instrument has an Option 002 and 006 combination skip to step 6 1 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in fi Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF WAVE FORM 2 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output and the digital multimeter input both to the oscilloscope s dc coupled high impedance vertical input using a tee Refer to Figure 4 1 3 Switch the digital multimeter to measure dc volts On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the de amplitude as listed in the following table For each setting the amplitude as read on the digital multimeter should be wi
185. llow you to insert or delete sequence entries 3C 4 HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements A A A A A A A mI O A A e E A Output Control f1 Manual The manual function allows the user to step through the sequence using the T 4 keys f2 Continuous Continuous mode causes a sequence to be repeated until it is either disabled using the f4 Stop key or stopped by exiting the Hop RAM Sequence menu f3 Burst The burst function causes a sequence to be output from 1 _to 127 times depending on the burst length setting The default is 1 f4 Stop This stops the current sequence during its execution Seg FREQ The sequence frequency determines the rate at which the sequence is executed For instance if the sequence frequency is set to 1 Hz each setting in the sequence is output for 1 second HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements 3C 5 A A A A A A ge cee eT HP IB Operation The following HP IB information is specific to Hop RAM Sequence operation Additional information on remote operation using HP IB is provided in section 3 3 HP IB Programming HP IB Programming codes a Function Mnemonic Form Example m Function Mnemonic Form Example a Function Mnemonic Form Example a Function Mnemonic Form Example a Function Mnemonic Form Example u Function Mnemonic Form Example u Function Mnemonic Form Example a Function Mnemonic Form
186. llowing general instructions should be used for repackaging with commer cially available materials a Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or plastic If shipping to a Hewlett Packard office or service center attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Use a strong shipping container A double wall carton made of 2 4 MPa 350 psi test material is adequate c Use enough shock absorbing material 75 to 100 millimeter layer 3 to 4 inches around all sides of the instrument to provide a firm cushion and to prevent movement in the container Protect the front panel with cardboard d Seal the shipping container securely e Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to assure careful handling rev 01JULYI 2 0 Installation Model 8904A 2 6 SIGNAL GROUND SHIELD CONNECT TO P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 11 ATN EARTH P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 10 SRQ GROUND SHOULD BE GROUNDED P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 9 IFC NDAC NRFD DAV EO DIO 4 DIO 3 DIO 2 DIO 1 NEAR TERMINATION P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 OF OTHER WIRE OF P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 7 TWISTED PAIR P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 6 REN DIO 8 DIO 7 DIO 6 DIO 5 ISOMETRIC THREAD M3 5 x 0 6 24 PIN MICRO RIBBON SERIES 57 CONNECTOR Logic Levels The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus logic levels are TTL compatible that is the true 1 state is 0 0 Vdc to 0 4 Vdc and the false 0 state is 2 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc P
187. lude a sample and hold to remove DAC switching noise filters to remove quantization noise smooth the transitions between samples from the DAC amplifiers to boost the maximum output and attenuators to increase the outputs dynamic range For more detailed information on how the HP 8904A creates signals refer to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Service Manual Operating Considerations All Instruments Amplitude Resolution The amplitude resolution of the HP 8904A is provided by a combination of digital and analog controls and can be specified in smaller increments than what is displayed on the front panel of the instrument Because of this method of adjustment the amplitude resolution varies between output voltage levels Refer to the Operating Technical Reference Amplitude Resolution information included later in Section 3 if you need more information regarding very fine amplitude adjustments Floating Output The HP 8904A is designed to allow the user to have a floating ground that is independent of the chassis ground of the instrument This is why there is a LOW and HIGH connection for each output You may also prefer a normal chassis referenced ground for your application using the shield of the HIGH connector for the ground reference The FLOAT control allows you to select the type of signal reference you require The instrument always powers up in the floating ground mode If you have specified the correct output d
188. lways set to zero 0 when the Destination is changed If you turn the Destination Off for any channel you can not change the amplitude for that channel until it is turned back On Parameter gt Value Ezample Terminator frequency gt 0 0 1 8 24 Hz kHz destination ch A 1 2 or OFF none destination ch B C D 1 2 AM FM M none DSB PULSE OFF amplitude AC gt 0 3 2 18 01 UV mV V amplitude DC 1 1 9 3 07 pV mV V amplitude ch B C D gt 20 4 34 07 Hz kHz deg 4V mV V Modulating ch A Use the appropriate Terminator for each modulation type phase gt 0 0 1 3 6 rad deg waveform none Ny L N PLU NOISE float lor2 ON or OFF filter lor2 Low Overshoot or Sharp Cutoff output 1 or 2 ON or OFF For step by step operation examples refer to the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide Model 8904A OUTPUT 1 E HIGH EN L SHARP CUTOFF o LOW OVERSHOOT D CHANNEL Asmo sen Fire z SHARP CUTOFF q LOW OUTPUT 2 ce HIGH FLOAT 1 LOW OVERSHOOT CIRCUIT GNO 1 Figure 3 2 HP 8904A Signal Control Functions Operation CHANNEL D OPTION 881 CHANNEL C OPTION 891 CHANNEL B OPTION 881 AND 9921 3 5 Operation Model 8904A 3 4 INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS AND OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS The following paragraphs briefly explain how a signal is generate
189. mode number gt Example TMDO TMD3 Set Tone Mode 0 Off 1 is R L 2 is R L 3 R only 4 L only Query T one Read present tone mode P ilot Read present pilot mode P reemphasis Read present preemphasis mode HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements 3C 11 SR a a A a a ee a oe ee AE Data Query Form ASCII Data Implied Units 0000000 0 Hz 0000000 0 Hz 0000000 0 Hz 0000000 0 Hz 0000000 0 Hz 0000000 0 Hz CL 00 000000 Volts 00 000000 Volts PP 0000 0 Degrees PPIS 0000 0 Degrees 0000 0 Percent 0000 0 Percent Value Same as input QTM 0 Value Value In this Chapter Set Up Your Equipment Note Output Two Signals at Once In this chapter you will learn to operate the Dual Output Ports provided by Configuration Option 02 If your HP 8904A is equipped with Option 02 this demonstration will show you how to e Output a Signal at each Output Port e Vary the Phase Relationship of the Signals at each Output Port e Set Up Some Applications that use the Dual Output Ports e Modulate at One Output Port and Sum at the Other only for instruments that are also equipped with four channels Option 01 Connect your HP 8904A to the oscilloscope as shown above A dual trace oscilloscope is required to complete the demonstrations in this chapter 4 2 Output Two Signals at Once Adjust Your Oscillo
190. modulating waveforms 4 Disable output blanking 515 not yet defined x HF 8904A Main Selection Level f 1 Channel Config Xt Channel Configuration Mode 11 Press NEXT LAST keys 4 Exit XXX Diagnostic Tests and Checks XXX fi Keyboard Check f4 Exit f1 ROM Checks 3 RAM Check ch A FREQ 1800 89 HZ AMPTO 140 pY f2 LCD Check f4 Exit PHASE 9 0 Deg WFORM Sine OESTN Outi OPT 001 1494 8 HZ AMPTO ch C FREQ 1000 0 HZ AMPTD ch D FREQ 1888 6 HZ AMPTD PHASE 6 6 Deg WFORM Sine BESTN Off ch B FREQ 1 PPL Check fz 3 Memory Map Acess 4 Exit alt f1 Hop Ram Adrs Freq AMPTOX VN PHASE OPT 003 f1 ll Digital Port 0ff f3 Freg Hop Dff f2 H mptd Hop Off f4 PhaseHop Off l n d OPT 001 x Tone Sequence Mode Press NEXT LAST keys 4 Exit 1 Tone Number FREQ 8 0 f2 On Time 1 00ms f4 Off Time 1 68ms f1 Seq Index 1 e123456789ABCDEF J S 2 Seq End 250 f4 Edit Sequence 1 Manual AMP TD 140 v Y 2 Continuous 3 Single f4 Stop SA MAIN i ver s ay OPT 001 DTMF Sequence Mode G NEXT LAST keys f4 Exit de Digital Sequence Mode NEXTyLAST keys 4 Exit fi Tone Number 4 3 Manual Dial 40 To f2 On Time 1 0ms f 1 Seq Index 1 8123456789ABCDEF 7 f2 Seq End 250 f4 Edit Sequence f1 S f2 Seq End 250 f4 Edit Sequence nual fl Ma
191. modulation The Frequency set value selected is greater than the permitted maximum for this waveform Either AM or DSB modulation is active so Amplitude Hop Ram cannot be changed The present value of the Hop Ram amplitude settings will exceed the maximum permitted value and therefore the Amplitude Hop Ram cannot be turned on The present value of the Hop Ram frequency settings will exceed the maximum permitted value and therefore the Frequency Hop Ram cannot be turned on The attempted Frequency Hop Ram set value is greater than the permitted maximum for this waveform Phase modulation is presently active therefore Phase Hop cannot be changed The present Channel A waveform cannot be used at the present frequency setting of Channel A if the Frequency Hop Ram is disabled Miscellaneous Errors The amplitude value selected is greater than the permitted maximum The amplitude value selected results in a sum which is greater than the maximum permitted value The frequency value selected is greater than the maximum permitted value When the Amplitude Hop Ram was disabled the last Channel A amplitude setting could not be used with present instrument parameters Adjust the the Channel A amplitude to within non Hop Ram limits The selected Waveform cannot be generated at the present frequency setting The dc Waveform can only be selected for a channel which has an Output Port or Off as a destination Channel A Waveform cannot be changed to dc
192. mproper number format HP IB numeric input error The number was too large or too small or a negative value was received when a positive value was required A number value was sent via HP IB when one was not expected Invalid unique data was input via HP iB Unique data specifies the Waveform Modulation Type Modulation On Off Control and Filter Selection when entering a data string via HP IB Unique data was received via HP IB when none was expected Refer to Error 44 for an explanation of unique data An invalid terminator for the present data type was received via HP IB A data terminator specifies the units of the data entered i e Hz Degrees Volts Seconds Percent etc the ENTER command is also included in this group A Data Terminator was received via HP IB when none was expected Refer to Error 46 for an explanation of data terminators A combination of errors 41 through 47 probably exists Confirm that at least one of these errors exists and correct it Enter the data again and read any error messages that result an error number other than 48 should be displayed The second error message should help to further isolate the error until it is eliminated Signal Sequence Mode Errors Time value entered is out of range On and Off Time values cannot both be zero Amplitude value entered is out of range Frequency value entered is out of range Tone Number entered is out of range Only tone numbers 0 F Hexad
193. n metalic tuning tool Refer to the Component Locator Figure 5 6 If the Multifunction Synthesizer has Option 006 reconnect the coax to A3J400 and perform Adjustment 3 Adjustment 2 Model 8904A Adjustments Adjustment 3 OUTPUT GAIN OPTION 006 Description The gain of the A6 High Power Output Assembly is adjusted so that the output amplitude for a sinewave is correct when the output is terminated and open circuit This adjustment is made after performing Adjustments 1 and 2 Equipment Digital Votele cansar asas cie HP 3478A Feedthrough Termination 6000 0 ccc cc cece ccc ee eee eee ence eee eens HP 11095A Procedure 1 Remove the instrument s bottom cover 2 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the voltmeter input Do not use a feedthrough termination at this time Switch LINE to ON 3 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF AMPTD 10 V 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer adjust A6R1 until the voltmeter reads between 19 8 and 20 2 Vrms 5 Connect a 6000 feedthrough termination at the voltmeter s input 6 On the Multifunction Synthesizer adjust A6R5 until the voltmeter reads between 9 9 and 10 1 Vrms Adjustment 3 5 7 ee ee ee Ge Adjustments Model 8904A Adjustment 4 SHARP CUTOFF LOW PASS FILTER Description The frequency response of the Sharp Cutoff
194. nce Manual Step Single Sequence or Continuous Cycle DIGITAL CHANNEL A DIGITAL DTMF QUTPUT 1 Figure 3 9 The HP 8904A s Signal Sequence Capabilities A A T 3 18 Output a Sequence of Signals A EEE aen Key Points About Operation Number of Frequencies Table 3 2 contains a few operating considerations you should keep in mind as you configure your signal sequences Table 3 3 contains the specified operating ranges for each the Signal Sequence Modes Table 3 2 Operating Considerations for Signal Sequencing Copy e KZ the blue SHIFT key and then f2 Lir Ti 1 mne or Paramenters f4 Lit T T 1 me softkeys to copy the displayed time for every tone or DTMF signal e The specified Tones or DTMF signals will not appear at the output gt 140 uV until an amplitude setting has been entered e The Signal Sequence Modes can only be output at Output Pont 1 Table 3 3 Signal Sequence Specifications KOAD ANN 0 80 ms to 655 35 ms 0 80 ms to 655 35 ms 1 to 250 Tones DTMF MO 1 0 ms to 655 35 ms 1 1 0 ms to 655 35 ms ms to 1 0 ms to 655 35 ms 35 ms 1 to 1 to 250 DTMF signals DTMF 1 to 250 DTMF signals ia hiss Sequence cant dada Digital 10V to NTE 10V to 10V 0 1 ms to 655 35 ms 1 Note that either the On Time or the Off Time can be set to 0 but not both Output a Sequence of Signals 3 19 How to Sel Up The following setup example demonstrates a Tone Sequence that can
195. nce any time an error occurs during operation Enabling this special prevents the beeper from working in either case Special 3 Reverse Modulating Waveforms The modulating waveform is reversed to provide alternate modulating schemes especially when using the ramp Normally the ramp waveform starts at the negative peak and ramps up to the positive peak This special function reverses the ramp when used as a modulating source by starting the waveform at the positive peak and ramping down Sine triangle and square modulating waveforms are also reversed but the effect is not as noticeable since they are symmetrical waveforms Operation Model 8904A Special 4 Disable Output Blanking When the amplitude of a signal being output is changed enough to cause a change in the setting of the discrete attenuators on the output board the signal is normally shut off or blanked to prevent switching transients from being output during the change The blanking normally lasts about 14 msec Enabling this special tells the instrument to continue to output the signal during the process of changing the attenuators thereby reducing the amplitude switching time to about 2 msec but allowing any switching transients that may be present to be output in the process Special 5 Floating Outputs on Power Up You can pre define whether the output s will be floating or chassis ground referenced when the instrument is powered up Special 6 Enable Synchrono
196. ncreased to 20 V rms into an open circuit or 10 V rms into a 6002 load Detailed operating information for this function is provided in the HP 8904A Option 006 supplement in section 3B 1 8 HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS Compatibility The Multifunction Synthesizer has an HP IB interface and can be used with any HP IB computing controller or computer for automatic system applications The Multifunction Synthesizer is fully programmable via the HP Interface Bus The Multifunction Synthesizer s complete compatibility with HP IB is defined by the following list of interface functions SH1 AH1 T6 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PP1 DC1 DTO and CO The Multifunction Synthesizer interfaces with the bus via open collector TTL circuitry An explanation of the compatibility codes can be found in the IEEE Standard 488 and the identical ANSI Standard MC1 1 For more detailed information relating to programmable control of the Multifunction Synthesizer refer to Remote Operation Hewlett Packard Interface Bus in section 3 of this manual A booklet has been prepared entitled Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus to provide a complete overview of the theory and operation of HP IB To receive this booklet order HP part number 5952 0156 Selecting the HP IB Address The Multifunction Synthesizer s HP IB address is set by direct front panel entry and is stored in non volatile memory The instrument is delivered with address 26 already
197. nd carefully lay A10 aside coax cables will still be connected 6 Replace hold down screw from Step 3 with spacer found under A10 into mounting hole in center of A3 This screw must be in place during adjustment procedure for A3 Figure 5 4 How to Access A3 in Instruments Equipped with Option 002 o 16 Model 8904A Adjustments D CT O D CGD GO ype A onmo 20000000600 0000000000 Si R12 2000000009 o Al 0000000000 LCS Io ORis o SEG NN m 20000000000000000000 AE 50000000000000000000 o O 940 oo atin i a ULH o DIL1 91 o Obityo CA Wg aa cae O sen eeu ESO 5 0o 98 17 O va O49 0000000000 0000000000 praia 006000600 O bogaan o e o e o 00000000 O 5 ME C118 O Ol UTS 710 ei 19 o m o ari DIC otto DSI o Ezta ORIO n DR759 0 o ORTBO gt o ofseto e 100 338 GOL ter C 9 o S 00000000 O UU o N o Model 8904A 20000000000000000000 O a SE L Ln 9 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 9 9 0 0 9 0 Ln ce PI 00000000000000 cin 20000000000000D 00000000000000 abn eoo00000000000B O S 0 E O 00000000000000 OO o 00000000000000 0000000000000 92N ORO 2 o ciego 2a coin E Zein o Eao PHE ooo O DoT o 4 Er OSO nS n O ORO e S EE O NI 499 O Bok cena R Oiod O ea O D CG 0000900 O 00000
198. ng a tee Performance Test 5 4 17 E E AA AA Performance Tests Model 8904A 3 Set the audio analyzer to measure distortion in dB On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the amplitude and frequency as listed in the following table Also set the low pass filter on the audio analyzer as listed For each setting the distortion read on the audio analyzer should be within the limits shown NOTE Failure to pass this test may be due to ground loops in the test setup Try floating the Multifunction Synthesizer that is key in SHIFT FLOAT 1 ON set the audio analyzer s input to float and connect a pair of cables twisting them a few times between the high connectors and the low connectors Place the 500 load at the audio analyzer s input This concludes the test if the instrument does not have Option 002 Multifunction Synthesizer Settings Distortion Limits dB 20 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 Analyzer Low Pass Filter kHz 20 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 1 On an HP 8903B a 750 kHz low pass filter is selected when the other low pass filters are off Output 2 4 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF AMPTD 10 V 5 Connect the OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output to the audio analyzer s non floating input Terminate the audio analyzer s input in 502 using a tee 6 Set the aud
199. nnectors operating environment instrument mounting storage and shipment 2 2 INITIAL INSPECTION To avoid hazardous electrical shock do not perform electrical tests when there are any signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure covers and panels Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has been checked mechanically and electrically Procedures for checking electrical performance are given in Section 4 If the contents are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defect or if the instrument does not pass the electrical performance test notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s Inspection 2 3 PREPARATION FOR USE The Multifunction Synthesizer requires a power source of 100 to 120Vac 10 at 48 to 440 Hz or 220 to 240Vac 10 at 48 to 66 Hz Power consumption is 80 VA maximum This is a Safety Class I product 1 e provided with a protective earth terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the Mains power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the p
200. nnel B up in 45 degree steps You should be able to see the phase of the Channel B signal shift on the oscilloscope relative to the Channel A signal each time you press the key If you continue to press the 7 key you will find that the HP 8904A does not respond to your 45 degree increment at 315 degrees This is because the maximum phase shift allowed by the HP 8904A is 359 9 degrees 4 6 Output Two Signals at Once How to Set Up Some Applications Stereo Phase Test Signal The following setup examples demonstrate two test appplications that can be simplified using the Dual Output Ports Application Used to align stereo audio cassette player tape deck heads Table 4 1 Instrument a ce for the Stereo Phase Test ltd Comments 1 Connect Output Port 1 to the left input on the stereo and Output Port 2 to the right input 2 Connect the stereo s left and right outputs to the oscilloscope 3 Set the oscilloscope for A vs B The pattern shown above represents the desired zero phase difference between the stereo s channels Output Two Signals at Once 4 7 Variable Phase Signal Application Testing phase performance on two channel devices such as characterizing phase detectors or testing servo system stability Table 4 2 instrument Settings for a Variable Phase Signal Comments 1 Adjust Channel B s phase to vary the phase differential The HP 89
201. nt BW above 20 kHz in a 750 kHz measurement BW at 5V into a 509 Load m y Qu Z Q m 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz Frequency Typical Level Flatness 1 kHz ref at 5V _ into a 509 load 0 1 dB ca YO A S 0 dB 3 EL 0 1 dB 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz Frequency Typical SSB phase noise at 500 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 1 kHz Offset Frequency 10 Hz 1 3 General Information Model 8904A Table 1 1 HP 8904A Specifications 2 of 4 OPTION 001 SPECIFICATIONS 502 outputs only Modulation Modulation for channel A ONLY and specified for sinewave carrier and modulation Internal channels B C and D can be used to either collectively modulate channel A with one modulation type or can provide simultaneous modulation of channel A with any of the available modula tion types External modulation is NOT possible Amplitude Modulation with Option 001 Rate 0 Hz to 600 kHz Depth range 0 to 100 of carrier amplitude Resolution 0 1 of carrier amplitude Frequency Modulation with Option 001 Rate 0 Hz to 600 kHz Deviation range 0 Hz up to 600 kHz however Famer T Faeviation lt 600 KHz Resolution 0 1 Hz or 3 2 digits whichever is less Phase Modulation with Option 001 Rate 0 Hz to 600 kHz Range 0 up to 179 9 channel however Fog X Dev 57 3 Resolution 0 1 or 0 001 radians Pulse or DSBSC Modulation with Option 001 Rate 0
202. o set the On Time for all of the other DTMF signals to 44 ms as well 7 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the f4 UT Time softkey to also set the Off Time for the other DTMF signals to 44 ms Co ao a 8 Press the fl Tone Humber softkey and then the C key You A have accessed the C DTMF signal When in the DTMF Sequence oO ee ae Mode each front panel DATA key 0 through 9 A through D Se ee and and on the HP 8904A is assigned the appropriate i Tonon oe DTMF signal as defined by the Touch tone industry standard Notice that the On Time and Off Time for the C DTMF signal have each been set to 44 ms 3 12 Output a Sequence of Signals a A A A A A A A AAA A A A O al Specify the 9 Now press the NEXT key to access the Sequence String display Sequence Order This display allows you to define the order in which you wish to sequence through the DTMF signals Note that the softkeys shown on this display are the same as those described for the Tone Sequence Mode Refer to How to Output a Tone Sequence if you wish to review the operation of these functions Select the Run Mode 10 Press the NEXT key to access the Run Mode display AMPTO TZ Single 11 Press the AMPTD key and enter 2V The output amplitude of each DTMF signal will now be 2 Vpk 12 Press the f1 anu al key and then the key to step through the DTMF Sequence Output a Sequence of Signals 3 13 Manual Dial Remember You can also output the DTMF
203. ocedure i Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output and OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output together with a tee and connect the tee to the oscilloscope s input Switch the oscilloscope input to 509 or connect a 5002 load at the input using a second tee Refer to Figure 4 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in fi Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 10 kHz AMPTD 1 V NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF FREQ 10 kHz AMPTD 1 V INCR SET 5 mV PHASE 180 deg INCR SET 1 deg Adjust the oscilloscope vertical gain and sweep speed to view the nearly nulled 10 kHz outputs from the Multifunction Synthesizer On the Multifunction Synthesizer press AMPTD then press the ft or U keys if necessary to minimize the 10 kHz signal on the oscilloscope NOTE Ignore any high frequency fuzziness on the signal The only concern is to minimize the 10 kHz component On the Multifunction Synthesizer press PHASE then press the 7 or 0 keys a few times to locate the null of the 10 kHz signal The null should occur between 179 9 and 180 1 deg At 10 kHz 0 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 179 9 __________ 180 1 deg On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in LAST FREQ 100 kHz NEXT FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 1 V PHASE 180 deg On the Multifunction Synthesizer press AMPTD then press the Q or Q keys if necessary to minimize the 100 kHz s
204. odes to the same settings that existed when the Save Register was selected 13 Press the f1 Hof Fam Adr softkey the 0 key and then the ENTER key to return to the first Hop Register 14 Press the NEXT key to access the Hop Parameter Selection display This display allows you to specify which of Channel A s settings you wish to hop fi Digital Fort Of 15 Press the f2 Hmp td Hop softkey and then the ON key You have configured the HP 8904A to hop Channel A s amplitude setting The amplitude of the signal on your oscilloscope should increase to 2 Vpk The HP 8904A is now outputting its Channel A signal at the amplitude specified in Hop Register 0 2 Vpk Note that the frequency of the output signal however is not 5 kHz as specified in Hop Register 0 The HP 8904A only uses the parameters from the Hop Register that have been turned on amplitude in this case Since the frequency parameter has not yet been turned on the HP 8904A continues to use Channel A s frequency setting 16 Now press the 8 Er Hopr softkey and then the ON key Now the frequency of Channel A is also being set by Hop Register 0 Hop the Output Signal 5 7 AS EAN E EA EE EE E E E AA Select the 17 Press the LAST key to return to the Hop Configuration display Hop Registers Note that the HP 8904A has removed the asterisk from the frequency and amplitude entry fields on the display to signify that they are currently turned on ET Hop Raw
205. of applications that require both modulated and unmodulated signals Table 4 4 Instrument Settings for the Four Channel Dual Output Ports Demonstration Remember Only Channel A can be modulated by the other channels and each channel can have only one destination at a time Output Port 1 Output Port 2 or as a modulation source to Channel A 4 12 Output Two Signals at Once hings to Figure 4 4 provides an overview of the HP 8904A s operation when Remember About it is equipped with four channels and Dual Output Ports Dual Output Ports Operation CHANNEL A MODULATION CHANNEL B DESTINATION CONTROL OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 Figure 4 4 Channel and Output Configuration for HP 8904A s Equipped with Four Channels and Dual Output Ports Output Two Signals at Once 4 13 A EET Key Points Table 4 5 contains operating considerations you should keep in mind About Operation as you configure the HP 8904A s four channels for dual output operation Table 4 5 Operating Considerations for Dual Output Port Operation using Four Channels Output Signal e Each Channel can be output at either Output 1 or 2 Configure l AN e Ali considerations shown in Chapter 2 for Four Channel Channels Operation still apply In This chapter Set Up Your Equipment Hop the Output Signal y A anian y eoe Z R S E In this chapter you will learn how to operate the Hop Mode capabilities provided b
206. of the HP 8904A s 15 other Tone Registers This function is useful when you wish to have the same Off Time for all of your tones In this demonstration the tones you configure will all have the same Off Time but will each have a different On Time For your own applications note that the displayed On Time can also be copied by pressing the blue SHIFT key and the f2 Un T 1 me softkey Configure Tone Register 1 6 Press the f1 Tune Humber softkey and then press 7 key to access Tone Register 1 The Tone Number shown in the display indicates which Tone Register is currently being displayed 7 Press the FREQ key and enter 2 kHz 8 Press the f2 Un T ime softkey and enter 1 5 ms Configure Tone Register 2 9 Press the f1 Tone Humber softkey and then the 2 key You can access the various Tone Registers by using either the or Y keys or by directly entering the number of the register you desire 10 Press the FREQ key and enter 3 kHz 11 Press the f2 Uri T ime softkey and enter 2 ms Configure Tone Register 3 12 Press the f1 Tone Humber softkey and then the 2 key to access Tone Register 3 13 Press the FREQ key and enter 4 kHz 14 Press the f2 Un Titi softkey and enter 2 5 ms You have set up four individual tones in Tone Registers 0 through 3 Table 3 1 shows the four tones that you have configured Table 3 1 Tone Configuration 3 6 Output a Sequence of Signals EEES NE A A A Specify the Sequence Order 15 Press the NEXT
207. of the selected channel up to SEEDS S 359 9 degrees 5 Press the 0 key Note on the oscilloscope that the pulse modulation provided by Channel C is advanced 45 each time the 7 key is pressed a dl CEs HE ST el DO Go E SE S cae es T N E A AAA i A E HRS e LL MARIN EAT TTT a Note If you continue to press the t key you will find that the HP 8904A does not respond to your 45 degree increment at 315 degrees This is because the maximum phase shift allowed by the HP 8904A is 359 9 degrees 315 45 360 Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 13 How to Sum the Modulation Signals Note With the HP 8904A you can even sum the modulation signals first and then use the resulting signal to modulate Channel A in any one of the HP 8904A s modulation modes In the following steps you will sum Channels B and C and use the resulting signal to amplitude modulate Channel A If you have just completed the preceding demonstration How to Set Up Simultaneous Modulation your HP 8904A is correctly configured for beginning this demonstration proceed to step 1 on the next page If your HP 8904A is not configured as shown in Table 2 2 please configure Channels A B and C as shown in the table before you begin this demonstration Table 2 2 Instrument Settings for Channels A B and C 2 14 Modulate or Sum the Signals Sum Channels B and C 1 Press the blue SHIFT ke
208. ort Table 1 4 lists the channels and output ports provided by the Configuration Options Table 1 4 Channel and Output Port Configuration Options Channels A B C and D Output 1 Channels A and B Outputs 1 and 2 Channels A B C and D Outputs 1 and 2 1 16 Meet the HP 8904A Choose Between Chassis or Floating Ground Chassis Ground At the beginning of this demonstration you configured the HP 8904A s circuit ground to be referenced to chassis ground Figure 1 8 shows a simplified block diagram of the chassis ground configuration FLOATING GROUND CHASSIS kat GROUND OUTPUT SIGNAL Figure 1 8 Circuit Ground is Connected to Chassis Ground when the FLOAT LED is Off Floating Ground When the FLOAT LED is on for Ouput 1 or 2 the HP 8904A s circuit ground is not referenced to chassis ground at that output Floating ground is the HP 8904A s Preset or default output configuration Meet the HP 8904A 1 17 A A eena The floating ground configuration LED on allows the HP 8904A s circuitry to be referenced to an external ground rather than to chassis ground This configuration eliminates ground loops between the HP 8904A and the input device Figure 1 9 shows two methods for connecting the floating Output Port to an input device Caution The voltage differential between the HP 8904A s floating ground level and its chassis ground level should not exceed a maximum of 10 Vpk a
209. ound connections eA synthesized signal source whose frequency amplitude e and phase setting can be changed in a fast hopping mode As an example an instrument equipped with all three Configuration Options would have the following capabilities e Four Channels Option 01 e Signal Sequence Modes Option 01 e Two Output Ports Option 02 e One Channel of the four that could be hopped Option 03 1 Note that each Output Port provides both a High and a Low connection The operation of these connections will be demonstrated further later in this chapter 1 4 Meet the HP 8904A HP 8904A Operation A Guided Tour Note How io Begin In this chapter you will learn how to output each of the HP 8904A s six waveforms If your HP 8904A is equipped with one of the Configuration Options 01 02 or 03 you will also want to refer to Chapters 2 through 5 to learn to use the capabilities that they provide Table 1 2 provides a quick guide to the chapters you will want to look at to learn to operate your HP 8904A Table 1 2 Chapter Guide for the Various Configuration Options No Options Chapter 1 Option 01 Only Chapters 1 2 and 3 Options 01 and 02 Chapters 1 2 3 and 4 Options 01 02 and 03 Chapters 1 2 3 4 and 5 Options 01 and 03 Chapters 1 2 3 and 5 Option 02 Only Chapters 1 and 4 Options 02 and 03 Chapters 1 4 and 5 Option 03 Only Chapters 1 and 5 You should complete the operating
210. ower up condition including the Special Function settings and Floating ground 2 Press the blue SHIFT key the RECALL key the 1 key and then press the ENTER key Note that the HP 8904A s Save Register settings are retained whether you use the MAIN key or the PRESET key or even if the instrument is powered down 3 Switch the HP 8904A s power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON Since Special Function 0 was turned off when you pressed the PRESET key the HP 8904A now powers up to the Main Selection Level rather than the state it was in Table 1 5 Summary of how the PRESET and MAIN keys affect Operation e Returns operation to the Main Selection Level Resets operating functions to their pre defined power up condition including Special Function settings and Floating ground OS e Does not reset Save Registers e Returns operation to the Main Selection Level e Does not reset Special Function settings Save Registers or Floating ground ee Hes 1 the f4 E 1 T softkey s effect on operation is similar to that of the MAIN key 1 22 Meet the HP 8904A Things to Remember Key Points About Operation Congratulations you are now familiar with the key operating capabilities that are standard to all HP 8904A s Table 1 6 shows the final settings that you entered for Channel A in this demonstration Similar tables are used in the remaining chapters to describe the channel
211. p a Signal Sequence Application Set Up Your Equipment Connect your HP 8904A to the oscillocope as shown above 3 2 Output a Sequence of Signals Adjust Your Oscilloscope Display Sea A Aa AR H R A Channel A Volts DIVISION 3 aimara casa danita ios 2V COTE a eer H 3 E dc High Impedance Time DIVISION td Os 1 35 ms o O ne cose E E ET EEE Channel A Select Chassis Ground 1 aree ak am A a aaea eer A AA RA Sp AA R 2 ES 2 L f AA PARA cr KK A Ad AREA AAA a La Sta 3 E UT whe os v ME 7 a pe tian O ae ta aet ae he OEA c S a A S AAA ense bat NY AA A aa ria See A L LA Press the blue SHIFT key and then the PRESET key Press the blue SHIFT key and then the FLOAT key Press the 1 key and then the OFF key to reference the HP 8904A s circuit ground to chassis ground at Output 1 Note that the FLOAT LED for Output 1 is now off Adjust the oscilloscope s trace position if necessary to center scale Output a Sequence of Signals 3 3 How to Output a Tone Sequence Tone Sequencing refers to the serial transmission of individual tones in a predetermined order The HP 8904A s Tone Sequence Mode enables you to configure 16 individual sinewave tones and arrange them in a sequential order that contains up to 250 sequence steps In this demonstration you will learn about Tone Sequence operation by configuring a seven step sequence using four individual tones 1 Press the NEXT key and
212. ple program C 8 Fast Hop 5 9 Four Channel sample program C 7 Help Messages B 2 Hop Mode 5 11 Hop Mode sample program C 11 channel configuration sample program C 4 r INCR SET 1 11 Insert 3 7 Installation A 1 LEDs 1 12 MAIN 1 21 Manual Dial 3 13 Manual Run 3 8 modulation 2 4 2 9 2 20 AM 2 5 ranges 2 21 simultaneous 2 10 summation of signals 2 13 2 15 with Option 02 4 8 NOISE 1 22 Off Level 3 15 3 18 Off Time 3 5 3 18 On Level 3 15 3 18 On Time 3 5 3 18 Option 01 2 1 3 1 HP IB Codes C 4 sample HP IB program C 7 C 8 with 02 block diagram 4 12 Option 02 4 1 HP IB C 9 sample HP IB program C 9 Option 03 5 1 HP IB C 10 sample HP IB program C 11 Output 1 15 OUTPUT 1 13 Output Port 1 12 control 1 13 1 22 ground 1 16 impedance 1 13 LEDs 1 12 output signal 1 7 level 1 9 summation 2 16 Period 3 15 3 18 PHASE 1 11 Hop Mode 5 7 Option 02 4 5 Phase Continuous Sweep 2 25 3 19 Phase Modulation ranges 2 21 Power A 1 PRESET 1 2 1 21 Pulse Modulation ranges 2 21 RECALL 1 19 Run Mode 3 8 index 3 i ee ee S SAVE 1 18 Save Hop Mode 5 6 Signal Sequence Modes 3 9 Seq Base 3 15 Seq Index 3 6 Sequence Length 3 18 Sequence String 3 6 Signal Sequence Modes 3 1 3 17 copy 3 18 Help Messages B 3 HP IB Codes C 4 specifications 3 18 simultaneous modulation 2 10 SPECIAL 1 20 Special Functions 1 22 specifications Signal Sequence Modes
213. put signal Appendixes A Installation B Help Messages C HP IB Codes Index What is the HP 8904A Note What s in this Guide Note Meet the HP 8904A The HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer is a flexible tool designed to meet your low frequency signal source needs by providing e A frequency range of dc to 600 kHz e Synthesized waveforms sine ramp triangle square noise and dc e Operating modes that meet the needs of a wide range of audio test modulation source and communication signaling applications If you are unpacking a new HP 8904A you will want to refer to the installation suggestions provided in Appendix A This Operation and Application Guide begins by helping you determine which operating capabilities your HP 8904A has been equipped with It is essential that you know which operating capabilities your HP 8904A has been equipped with in order to use this guide effectively The guide then helps you quickly learn to use your instrument s capabilities by guiding you through setup examples that demonstrate the HP 8904A s key features 1 2 Meet the HP 8904A Has Your HP 8904A Been Equipped with Additional Features You can quickly determine if your HP 8904A has been equipped with optional operating capabilities by performing the following steps 1 To power up your HP 8904A press the white LINE key 2 Now press the blue SHIFT key and then the PRESET key The adjacent
214. r 0 19 or 0to10V p p 31 2 digits 6 282 rad 0 001 rad 5022 load Gaussian N A N A N A N A O to 10 V p p 31 5 digits Noise 502 load N A N A N A N A 10V 31 2 digits open circuit a Refer to the Operating Technical Reference information tater in Section 3 for a detailed explanation of Amplitude Resolution Refer to the Operating Technical Reference information later in Section 3 for more information regarding Phase Resolution for ramp triangle and square waves 3 8 SN Se es a o Ss A O Model 8904A Operation Option 001 Three More Channels Summation Modulation and Sequencing Operating Tutorial e HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Operation and Application guide HP part 5953 8491 Contains detailed operating instructions for most of the capabilities provided by Option 001 Instruments with serial prefix 2948A and above have additional functions available with Option 001 that are documented in section 3C Waveform Examples e HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Waveform Catalogue HP part 5953 8494 Contains examples of several types of waveforms that can be created with Option 001 and the instrument settings used to obtain those signals ANALOG CONVERSION B A ATTEN AMPLI wee HEH H HE ASI om AM FM OM DSB PULSE CHANNEL B FREQ CHANNEL C FREQ CHANNEL D preo Figure 3 4 HP 8904A Option 001 Operation Addition of Channels B C and D These additional channels
215. rate that new addresses can be changed is about 400 kHz every 2 5 ys A schematic showing an example of a circuit used to fast hop is provided in the Option 008 section of the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Operation and Application guide The timing diagram below illustrates fast hopping the signal at the maximum rate of 400 kHz changing the address on the Hop Register Address pins every 2 5 us 2 5uS 2 Sus 2 Sus 2 Sus ADDRESS X ADDRESS 1X ADDRESS 2X ADDRESS 3 THE HOP RAM ADDRESSES ARE CHANGED ON THE HOP REGISTER ADDRESS PINS THEN BUS HOP RAM HOP RAM HOP RAM THE SIGNAL FOR THE FIRST ADDRESS is an SHORE Z IS OUTPUT 8uS LATER D Figure 3 7 Fast Hop Timing Diagram Model 8904A Operation Trigger In This signal is used to initiate a single DTMF Tone or Digital sequence for instruments equipped with Option 001 It duplicates the f1 Single function to start a sequence You can demonstrate this function by setting up a sequence and then connecting pins 9 and 14 together to trigger the sequence The sequence is re triggered each time a high to low transition is applied to this pin Trigger Out This pin is not used with any of the current options and does not provide a useable output at this time Operation Model 8904A 3 6 REMOTE OPERATION 125 General Information The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB is an IEEE 488 compatible digital remote control system used for controlling up to 15 d
216. rformance Tests Procedure AC Amplitude Accuracy 1 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 ON 2 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH and LOW outputs to the multimeter s high impedance floating inputs through a 600 feedthrough termination Use two BNC to dual banana plug adapters and two BNC to single banana plug adapters supplied with the Multifunction Synthesizer as necessary to maintain a floating output 3 Set the digital multimeter to read ac volts 4 Set the Multifunction Synthesizer s amplitude and frequency as indicated in the following table For each setting the amplitude as read on the digital multimeter should be within the limits shown Multifunction Synthesizer Settings Voltage Reading Limits Vrms 30 10 9 4 100 1 000 10 000 20 000 100 000 30 100 1 000 10 000 20 000 100 000 30 100 1 000 10 000 20 000 100 000 AC Amplitude Flatness 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in FREQ 1 kHz AMPTD 10 V INCR SET 10 mV Performance Test 4 4 15 Performance Tests Model 8904A 6 Fine adjust the Multifunction Synthesizer s amplitude using the Sand Tkeys until the voltage reads between 9 99 and 10 01 Vac 7 Set the Multifunction Synthesizer s frequency as indicated in the following table For each setting the amplitude as read on the digital multimeter should be within the limit
217. ring Output Ports 1 and 2 C 10 HP IB Codes Table C 4 HP IB Codes That Can Be Used with Option 03 Instruments Form APH lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt Example APH2 123VL 7 Enter Hop Mode amplitude parameter Valid terminators are VL MV and UV Form AHR lt ON or OF gt Digital Port i Example AHROF Frequency FRH Amplitude Amplitude Hop On Off Control Form DPE lt ON or OF gt Example DPEOF Digital Port On Off Control Form FRH lt Frequency Value gt lt Terminator gt Example FRH723 5HZ Enter Hop Mode frequency parameter Valid terminators are HZ and KZ Form FHR lt ON or OF gt Example FHROF Frequency Hop On Off Control FHR Hop Register la Form HRA lt 1 or 2 Digit Address gt ET Example HRAQET Enter Hop Register address Addresses 0 15 are valid valid terminator is ET Form PHH lt Phase Value gt lt Terminator gt Example PHH59 3DG Enter Hop Mode phase Valid terminators are DG and RD Form PHR lt ON or OF gt Example PHROF Phase Hop On Off Control HP IB Codes C 11 Set Hop Ram address 5 310 OUTPUT 726 HRASET FRH3KZ APHEGUL Hop Freg 3 kHz Hop 10 ARA RARA AAA AAA ARANA 20 HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language o 30 x programming example for the o 40 le HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER 50 l x OPTION 03 fast hop 6 50 ARAHAL NAAA AAA 70 80 OUT
218. rned on The attempted Frequency Hop Ram set value is greater than the permitted maximum for this waveform Phase modulation is presently active therefore Phase Hop cannot be changed The present Channel A waveform cannot be used at the present frequency setting of Channel A if the Frequency Hop Ram is disabled Miscellaneous Errors The amplitude value selected is greater than the permitted maximum The amplitude value selected results in a sum which is greater than the maximum permitted value The frequency value selected is greater than the maximum permitted value When the Amplitude Hop Ram was disabled the last Channel A amplitude setting could not be used with present instrument parameters Adjust the the Channel A amplitude to within non Hop Ram limits The selected Waveform cannot be generated at the present frequency setting The dc Waveform can only be selected for a channel which has an Output Port or Off as a destination Channel A Waveform cannot be changed to dc while being modulated You can sum only one channel with a dc Waveform into an output board and one is already active An operation was directed to an output board which does not exist HP IB Codes Code Listings for This appendix contains listings of the HP IB programming codes for the HP 8904A the HP 8904A The codes are arranged in four tables The first table Table C 1 contains the HP IB codes for the functions that are standard to all HP 89
219. rogramming and Output Data Format Refer to Section 3 Operation Mating Connector HP 1251 0293 Amphenol 57 30240 Mating Cables Available HP 10833A 1 meter 3 3 ft HP 10833B 2 meters 6 6 ft HP 10833C 4 meters 13 2 ft HP 10833D 0 5 meters 1 6 ft Cabling Restrictions 1 A Hewlett Packard Interface Bus system may contain no more than 2 meters 6 6 ft of connecting cable per instrument 2 The maximum accumlative length of connecting cable for any Hewlett Packard Interface Bus system is 20 meters 65 6 ft Figure 2 1 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Connections rev LBMAY89 Model 8904A Operation Section 3 OPERATION 3 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides reference information for operating the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer by manual or remote control Information is given that helps you understand how the HP 8904A generates signals and what you must know in order to create the signal you need Button by button and tutorial operating instructions for options 001 002 and 003 are provided i in the HP 8904A Operation and Application guide Note Option 001 capabilities have been expanded for instruments with serial prefix 2948A and above Detailed operating and HP IB information for these functions is provided in section 3C Operating information for options 005 and 006 is provided in sections 3A and 3B The capabilities and specifications for the various options HP IB operation and codes and
220. rotection has been impatred the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation If this instrument is to be energized via an external autotransformer for voltage reduction make sure that the common terminal is connected to the earthed pole of the power source 2 1 Installation Model 8904A Line Voltage Selection and Fuse Replacement BEFORE PLUGGING THIS INSTRUMENT into the Mains line voltage be sure the correct voltage has been selected A rear panel switch permits operation from 100 to 120Vac when used in the 115V position or from 220 to 240Vac when used in the 230V position The number visible on the switch indicates which range of line voltage to supply to the instrument Verify that the line voltage selection switch is matched to the power source Table 2 1 lists the ratings and the HP part number for the replaceable fuse One fuse is supplied with each instrument It has the proper rating for 100 120 220 or 240Vac operation The fuse is installed in the instrument at the time of shipment The position of the line voltage selection switch is set according to the line voltage specified by the customer If the voltage is not specified the selection switch will be set according to the country of destination For protection against fire hazard the line fuse should only be a 250V fuse with the correct current rating Table 2 1 Line Fuse Rating and HP Part Number Line Voltage Part N
221. rtical sensitivity to 1 V division Adjust the vertical position of the de trace to coincide with the second graticule line from the top of the screen 5 On the Multifunction Synthesizer key in WAVE FORM Set the frequency indicated in the following table The amplitude is to remain the same as set in step 4 that is 8V For each setting adjust the oscilloscope s time scale to obtain a useable display and note the peak amplitude relative to the second graticule line The peak amplitude should be within the limits listed in the table Performance Test 2 rev O1JUL9I Model 8904A Performance Tests NOTE Drift in the oscilloscope may require periodically checking the de 4V ref erence line To do this simply set the Multifunction Synthesizer waveform back to dc check the de voltage on the digital multimeter and readjust the vertical position of the oscilloscope If it is difficult to locate the position of the limits on the display simply set the amplitude increment of the Multifunction Synthesizer to 0 08V and increment the amplitude down once then up once This increment causes a 0 08 division 1 level shift To improve the display resolution it is possible to use a more sensitive input range or vertical magnification if that feature is available However care must be taken to assure that the 8 Vpp signal does not overdrive the oscilloscope s input amplifier Peak Difference Limits divisions Frequency
222. rument synchronization and high level balanced output are also available A description of the available options is given in paragraphs 1 6 and 1 7 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A 1 4 SPECIFICATIONS General Information Table 1 1 HP 8904A Specifications 1 of 4 HP 8904A SPECIFICATIONS Specifications describe the instruments warranted performance 500 output only unless noted for automatic operation Mathematically derived charac teristics denote parameters which can be derived from specifications and knowledge of the digital generation methods used in the HP 89044 Sup plemental characteristics are intended to provide information useful in applying the instrument by giving typical but not warranted performance parameters These are noted as typical normal or approximate Frequency Range Sine wave 0 Hz to 600 kHz Square triangle ramp 0 Hz to 50 kHz Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy Internal 10 MHz timebase 50 ppm External 10 MHz timebase Same as accuracy and stability of external timebase AC amplitude sine wave Range 0 to 101 into a 502 load Resolution 31 2 digits Accuracy amplitude gt 40 mV 1 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz 3 100 kHz to 600 kHz Flatness amplitude gt 630 mV into 500 0 1 0 009 dB 0 1 Hz into 50 to 100 kHz 1 0 0 09 dB 100 kHz to 600 kHz Spectral Purity sine wave THD N including spurs amplitude gt 50 mV rms into 509 63 dBc rms 0 07
223. s 1 of 2 T Modulation Four Channel Operation Form DE lt Channel gt lt Destination gt Examples DEAOC1 DEAAM Set destination of channel Valid data values for destination are AM FM PM DS PU OC1 OC2 if the instrument is equipped with Option 02 and OF Amplitude Modulation valid AM terminators are or PC Frequency Modulation Phase Modulation valid PM terminators are DG or RD DSB Modulation Pulse Modulation ASRS SEES era SE SSR ER 1 See a ar a OL Signal Sequence Modes Amplitude Form APH lt Amplitude Value gt lt Terminator gt Example APH1 999VL Enter Tone or DTMF amplitude Amplitude terminators are VL MV and UV Digital Level Digital Sequence On Level Digital Sequence Off Level Form DAPH lt Amplitude gt lt Terminator gt Examples DAPH4VL DAPL 1VL Digital Sequence Mode amplitude terminators are VL MV and UV Select Binary Base Select Octal Base Select Hexadecimal Base Digital Sequence Base Off Time Form STOF lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example STOF1SC Set Off Time Tone and DTMF Sequence Valid terminators are MS and SC Form STON lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example STONS 3MS Set On Time Tone and DTMF Sequence Valid terminators are MS and SC Form SBP lt Time Value gt lt Terminator gt Example SBP9 3MS Set Period D
224. s to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members WARRANTY This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WAR
225. s PHASE then press the 0 or 0 keys a few times to locate the null of the 100 kHz signal The null should occur between 179 0 and 181 0 deg At 100 kHz 1 deg phase shift represents a delay of 28 ns Phase Null 1790 181 0 deg Performance Test 9 4 31 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 10 OUTPUT 1 TO OUTPUT 2 PHASE ACCURACY OPTION 002 Specification Option 002 Output 1 to Output 2 0 1 deg or 30 ns at the same frequency Phase Accuracy whichever is higher sine wave Description Channel A and Channel B of the Multifunction Synthesizer are nominally set to the same amplitude but with 180 deg phase difference The two channels are summed together externally so that the two signals in effect cancel each other The output is viewed on an oscilloscope The amplitude of Channel B is fine adjusted to null the signal as much as possible The phase of Channel B is fine adjusted also to further null the signal The amount of phase shift required to null the signal is the phase error between the two channels NOTE Output 1 to Output 2 phase accuracy for instruments with both Options 002 and 006 balanced output is not specified Equipment Oscos COP pia EA HP 1740A or Tektronix 2235 HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION OSCILLOSCOPE SYNTHESIZER OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUT 1 HIGH 2 HIGH Figure 4 5 Output 1 to Output 2 Phase Accuracy Performance Test Setup 4 32 Performance Test 10 Model 89044 Performance Tests Pr
226. s shown Voltage Reading Limits Vrms Frequency Setting Hz 4 16 Performance Test 4 Model 8904A Performance Tests Performance Test 5 SPECTRAL PURITY EXCEPT OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Specification ET T Spectral Purity sine wave including spurs amplitude gt 50 mVrms into 502 THD N 63 dBc rms 0 07 20 Hz to 7 5 kHz 30 kHz BW 63 dBc rms 0 07 7 5 to 20 kHz 80 kHz BW 55 dBc rms 0 18 20 to 100 kHz 750 kHz BW Description The total harmonic distortion plus noise THD N is measured directly by a distortion analyzer The distortion analyzer removes the fundamental with a notch filter and measures the signal out of the notch filter and the total input signal into the notch filter THD N is the ratio of these two voltages NOTE This test does not verify spectral purity for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 balanced output Refer to Performance Test 6 for that option However if the instrument has Option 002 and 006 perform the portion of this test for Output 2 Equipment Audo Analyzer ra as HP 8903B Procedure Output 1 NOTE If the instrument has an Option 002 and 006 combination skip to step 4 1 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF AMPTD 10 V 2 Connect the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output to the audio analyzer s non floating input Terminate the audio analyzer s input in 501 usi
227. s the NEXT key to return to the Hop Parameter Selection display Enable the 2 To enable the DIGITAL PORT press the f1 DIGITAL PORT Giaital For t softkey and then the ON key The HP 8904A is now ready to receive Hop Register addresses via its rear panel DIGITAL PORT Ch C Ch B Polarity Polarity Ch A Ch D Ch C Ch B Polarity Cha Ch D Zero Zero Zero Zero Polarity Crossing Crossing Crossing Crossing 8 6 5 4 5 2 1 O O O O O O Oo O O O O O O O O 15 14 613 1 2 11 10 9 Trigger Trigger 0 1 2 3 Circuit Out In Y Gnd Seg Mode Hop Register Address High True Figure 5 2 Pin Connect Diagram for the Rear Panel DIGITAL PORT ge eg AI Hop the Output Signal 5 9 Fast Hop Example Figure 5 3 shows an example of an address selection circuit for fast hopping an HP 8904A that is equipped with Option 01 and 03 at the rate of the Channel D frequency setting An external timing source can be used in place of the Channel D signal to increase the hop rate DIGITAL PORT oa ae 74ALS191N Figure 5 3 Example Address Selection Circuit for Fast Hopping the HP 8904A Table 5 2 Instrument Settings for the Fast Hopping Example A as ve rom comm om DCI CI EN ef eve CIN The following BASIC program can be used to set up the HP 8904A for this example over its HP IB S SP AUR Sa or ee 129 OUTPUT A FROS OHZ ZO L LEHR 136 OUTPUT A i WFESG T DTS TPK Ealo MIP RAM SETUP 140 OUTPUT A
228. scope DISDIAY sacarina dodo Alternate Volts DIVISION idas 1V Channels A and B COMPUSO aeiae TE RL REE A dc High Impedance TIME DIVISION ia AA hha e hae ween 0 2 ms TSSOP DPS OPEN CO E S EE E Channel A Select Chassis Ground 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and the PRESET key on the HP 8904A Note that all four Output LEDs are lit on HP 8904A s equipped with Dual Output Ports Press the blue SHIFT key and then the FLOAT key to access the Output Float Control display Press the 1 key and then the OFF key to reference the HP 8904A s circuit ground to chassis ground at Output 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the FLOAT key again Press the 2 key and then the OFF key to reference the HP 8904A s circuit ground to chassis ground at Output 2 as well Note that the FLOAT LEDs for Outputs 1 and 2 are now off Adjust the Channel A trace on the oscilloscope to halfway between the top and the middle of the display and the Channel B trace to halfway between the bottom and the middle of the display Output Two Signals at Once 4 3 How to Output The Dual Output Ports option provides you with two synthesized Si lat function generators Both a HIGH and a LOW output connection is a signa a provided for each function generator each Port CHANNEL A OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 Figure 4 1 Channel and Output Configuration for the Option 02 Dual Output Ports 1 Press the f1 Channel Contr iz softk
229. set but may be easily changed to any address desired from 00 to 30 decimal For information on changing the HP IB address refer to paragraph 2 3 PREPARATION FOR USE HP IB Address Selection 1 9 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED The power cable and fuse supplied for the Multifunction Synthesizer are selected at the factory according to the Mains voltage available in the country of destination For the part number and rating of the fuse refer to table 2 1 For the part numbers of the Power Cables and Mains Plugs available refer to table 2 2 Two BNC to Banana Plug adapters HP Part 1250 2164 are shipped with each standard instrument four adapters are shipped with an Option 002 instrument rev 01NOV89 1 9 General Information Model 8904A 1 10 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT Table 2 1 lists the test equipment required for performance testing adjusting and servicing the Multifunction Synthesizer The Critical Specifications column describes the essential requirements for each piece of test equipment Other equipment can be substituted if it meets or exceeds these critical specifications 1 11 DOCUMENTATION UPDATING 1 10 Serial Numbers Attached to the instrument is a serial number plate The serial number is in the form 1234A00123 The first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix The last five digits form the sequential suffix that is unique to each instrument The contents of these manuals apply directly to instruments having the s
230. shown The displayed resolution was limited to 35 digits due to display constraints There are actually 2048 available amplitude steps for each attenuator range To understand how this works an explanation of the implementation of the HP 8904A s amplitude control is needed All fine amplitude setting for the HP 8904A are handled in the digital domain using the Digital Waveform Synthesis IC A very high performance 12 bit by 12 bit multiplier is available in this integrated circuit Normally the multiplier is used for various types of amplitude modulation It is also used to scale the amplitude of waveforms for summing and to provide the fine level settings The analog output board has several attenuators which provide the large amplitude steps The available attenuators are 6 dB 12 dB 24 dB and 48 dB Various combinations of these attenuators are used to provide amplitude steps of approximately 6 dB they are exactly 5 of the previous scale which is 6 02 dB The following table shows the output voltage ranges and which combination of attenuators are used for each 3 39 Operation 3 40 Model 8904A Table 3 10 Output Amplitude Ranges and Their Associated Attenuators for the HP 8904A Analog Attenuators Actual 0 none 2 4414 mV 6 02 6 dB 1 2207 mV 12 04 12 dB 0 6104 mV 18 06 6 12 dB 0 3052 mV 24 08 24 dB 0 1526 mV 30 10 6 24 dB 76 2939 uV 36 12 12 24 d
231. site amplitude by pressing the AMPTD key and entering the desired amplitude 0 to 10 V p p into 500 f4 Pilot Press the f4 key to enable or disable the stereo pilot signal Third Menu Pilot Frequency Change the stereo pilot signal frequency by pressing the FREQ key and entering the desired frequency 0 1 Hz to 600 kHz Pilot Amplitude The pilot signal amplitude is entered as a percentage of the total composite signal amplitude Change the amplitude by pressing the AMPTD key and entering the desired amplitude in percent 0 0 to 100 0 f4 Pilot Press the f4 key to enable or disable the stereo pilot signal Same function as in previous menu PHASE The pilot tone phase can be adjusted from 0 0 to 359 9 relative to the rest of the composite waveform Change the phase by pressing the PHASE key and entering the desired phase value in degrees or radians HP 89044 Option 001 Enhancements 3C 9 A A A A A A A A A AAA A A E l Fourth Menu Carrier Frequency Change the carrier frequency by pressing the FREQ key and entering the desired frequency f2 Preemphasis Pre emphasis in the HP 8904A is configured so that the entered composite level is achieved at the maximum tone frequency allowed 15 kHz The rolloff of the composite level for frequencies lt 15 kHz follows the transfer function of the specified preemphasis time contant T pre emphasis setting aag al Change the pre emphasis by pressing the f
232. special function 4 This special disables the output blanking function With special function 4 active amplitude switches within a given analog attenuator range will be phase continuous see Amplitude Resolution for details on these ranges When an attenuator range is crossed however there will be a jump up or down in level depending on which attenuator switches first The second method is to use the capabilities of Option 003 Option 003 gives the HP 8904A the ability to fast hop the frequency amplitude or phase of channel A Any amplitude hops using this fast hopping mode will glitch free The HP 8904A fixes the analog attenuation range to accommodate the highest amplitude loaded into the HOP RAM memory All lower amplitude values are created using the multiplier in the Digital Waveform Synthesis IC The disadvantage of using this method is that for large amplitude jumps gt 6 dB fewer bits will be used which degrades the accuracy and residual distortion of the waveform In the Tone Sequence and DTMF Sequence Modes the HP 89044A will perform phase continuous switches between frequencies if no off time is specified between tones If some off time has been specified the HP 8904A will cutoff the sinewave at the set time regardless of where the switching point will be which will cause an audible click in the waveform This is caused b y the sudden drop to zero volts which is composed of high frequency energy If this glitch is not desired t
233. ss Flatness from 20 Hz to 100 kHz _________ 2 increments 12 For frequencies of 100 to 600 kHz in the table of step 10 compute the largest difference in number of increments The absolute value of this difference should be 20 increments or less Flatness from 100 to 600 kHz _________ 20 increments Performance Test 3 4 13 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 4 AC AMPLITUDE ACCURACY AND FLATNESS OUTPUT 1 WITH OPTION 006 Specification AC Amplitude Option 006 sine wave Range 0 to 20 Vrms into open circuit O to 10 Vrms into 6000 O to 4 Vrms into 1500 0 to 1 5 Vrms into 500 Accuracy gt 40 mVrms into a balanced 6002 load 6 0 5 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 12 1 0 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Flatness gt 40 mVrms into a balanced 6002 load 1 kHz reference 0 15 to 0 15 dB 30 Hz to 20 kHz 0 75 to 0 15 dB 30 Hz to 100 kHz Description AC amplitude accuracy and flatness for Output 1 of instruments with Option 006 are measured directly with a voltmeter NOTE This test verifies ac amplitude accuracy and flatness for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 If the instrument has Option 002 a second output also perform Performance Tests 2 and 3 Equipment DisitalMulbimeter scsi AO ds HP 3478A Feedthrough Termination 6000 ooooocoorconcronno coronar HP 11095A Adapter BNC to Dual Banana Plug 2 required cece cece eee eens HP 1251 2277 4 14 Performance Test 4 Model 8904A Pe
234. ssembly A5 Display Assembly A6 High Power Output Assembly Option 006 Reinstall Options 001 003 and 005 if formerly in the instrument Basic Functional Checks Performance Test 1 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 6 Display Backlighting and Contrast Adjustment 7 Phase Synchronization Option 005 Basic Functional Checks Performance Test 2 AC and DC Amplitude Accuracy Except Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 3 AC Amplitude Flatness Except Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 4 AC Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 5 Spectral Purity Except Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 6 Spectral Purity Output 1 with Option 006 Performance Test 7 Phase Accuracy Using an Oscilloscope Performance Test 8 Phase Accuracy Using a Time Interval Counter Performance Test 9 Channel to Channel Phase Accuracy Option 001 Performance Test 10 Output 1 to Output 2 Phase Accuracy Option 002 Performance Test 11 Unit to Unit Phase Accuracy Option 005 Performance Test 12 Tone Sequence Timing Accuracy Option 001 Performance Test 13 DTMF Sequence Timing Accuracy Option 001 Performance Test 14 Digital Sequence Period Accuracy Option 001 Adjustment 1 Output Gain and Offset Adjustment 2 Output Balance Adjustment 3 Output Gain Option 006 Adjustment 4 Sharp Cutoff Low Pass Filter Adjustment 5 Sine X X Compensation Basic Functional C
235. t The bail handle attaches to the front of the instrument to provide easy portability Order HP part number 5061 9702 Rack Flange Kit This kit contains all necessary hardware and installation instructions for mounting the Multifunction Synthesizer in a rack with 482 5 mm standard 19 inch by 133 mm 5 25 inch spacing One side of the instrument mounts directly to the rack an offset panel encloses the other side of the opening Order HP part number 5061 9657 For more information on available mounting hardware and cabinet options refer to the latest available Hewlett Packard products catalog rev 01INOV89 1 7 General Information Model 8904A 1 7 ELECTRICAL OPTIONS Option 001 Channel Configuration Mode Enhancements Three additional individually addressable internal channels are added for a total of 4 channels The frequency phase amplitude waveform and destination of each channel are individually defined by the user to provide the maximum flexibility of the instrument These additional channels provide the following functions Modulation of Channel A Channels B C and D can be used to generate up to 3 independent forms of modulation at the same time or they can be summed prior to modulating channel A to generate many complex waveforms The allowable modulation types are AM FM 6M DSBSC Double Side Band Suppressed Carrier and pulse Channel Summation Two three or four channels may be summed into a single output T
236. t Assignments Special Function Operation Bit Pattern Bit Weight 16 8421 Last State Recalled On Power Up XXX X XXX Disable Automatic Phase Reset XXX X XX1X Disable Beeper XXX X X1XX Reverse Modulating Waveforms XXX X 1XXX Disable Output Blanking XXX 1 XXXX 5 Floating Outputs On Power UP XXX 1 XXXX additional specials not yet implemented Example If Specials O and 4 are active RSF will return a value of 17 Special 0 is a bit weight of 1 and Special 4 is 16 giving the result of 17 rev 01NOV89 3 23 Operation Model 8904A Table 3 4 HP IB Codes for the Standard HP 8904A Functions 5 of 5 Description Kilohertz Hertz Degrees Radians Volts Millivolts Microvolts Enter Seconds Milliseconds Percent Percent Terminators Example EO Read External Reference Status This function allows you to determine whether the Time Base reference is external or internal If the External reference is on a 001 is returned if not a 000 is returned Time Base NM Waveform WF Form WF lt Channel gt lt Waveform gt Example WFATR Set waveform of a channel Valid data values for waveform are SI Sine RA Ramp TR Triangle SQ Square NS Noise DC dc 1 0 j WRK RECERARERHREKEKAERRRECREREKERRERRERTEREKREREKRER 20 HP SERIES 200 300 BASIC language 30 programming example for the z 40 standard HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION 50 SYNTHESIZER E 6
237. t normally be used since it is the address normally reserved for the internal controller HP IB addresses greater than 30 are invalid and will not be allowed to be stored in the instrument The instrument will normally be delivered with the HP IB address set to 26 The HP IB address can only be changed while the instrument is on and by using direct front panel entry To read or change the HP IB address key in SHIFT ADRS The front panel will display the current address and allow the entry of a new address Enter a new HP IB address by keying in the new address and pushing the ENTER key Interconnection Interconnection data for the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus is provided in Figure 2 1 Mating Connectors Coaxial Connectors Coaxial mating connectors used with the Multifunction Synthesizer should be 50 ohm BNC male connectors that are compatible with those specified in US MIL C 39012 Interface Connector HP IB mating connector is shown in Figure 2 1 Note that the two securing screws are metric DIGITAL PORT Connector This is a 15 circuit 15 pin type D subminiature connector Corresponding mating connector is HP part 1251 0221 or TRW part DAMI5P The Hop Ram functions for the port only operate on instruments equipped with Option 003 Hop Ram Operating Environment The operating environment should be within the following limitations Temperature a ii Al 0 Cto 50 C Humidity econo niza A A NT lt 95 relative at 40
238. the Tone Registers in whatever order you desire 3 10 Output a Sequence of Signals How to Output a In this demonstration you will learn how to configure your HP 8904A to emulate a telephone keypad for outputting DTMF DTMF Sequence Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals 1 If you are not currently at the Main Selection Level display press the blue SHIFT key and the MAIN key 2 Press the NEXT key and then the f3 L T HE Sequence softkey to access the DTMF Sequence Mode 4 HP 3904A Main Selection Level fi Channel Config _MAIN XxX DTMF Sequence Mode Press NEXT LAST keys 4 Exit 3 Manual Dial 1 012345679206004 Maral AMPTO 190 yu fz Continuous f2 Single f4 Stop Index Figure 3 4 How to Access the DTMF Sequence Mode Enter the DTMF 3 Press the NEXT key to access the DTMF Configuration display Parameters This display allows you to define the On Time and Off Time for each DTMF signal Output a Sequence of Signals 3 11 A A A a E A Configure DTMF Signal 0 4 Press the f2 Un Time softkey and enter 44 ms 5 Press the f4 DT Time softkey and enter 44 ms You have now defined the period of the 0 DTMF signal to be 88 ms Note that the default period for each DTMF signal is 2 ms 1 ms on and 1 ms off 44 ms 44 ms ON TIME OFF TIME TEOR EN ECT UE UD UA T OR E Figure 3 5 O DTMF Signal Copy the On and Off Times 6 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the f2 Un T 1 ne softkey t
239. the start input of the time interval counter Refer to Figure 4 4 6 On test Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 5 V 7 On the reference multifunction synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 5 V 4 28 Performance Test 8 Model 8904A Performance Tests 8 Set the frequency of both Multifunction Synthesizers as indicated in the following table as was done in step 4 For each setting perform the following steps a On the test Multifunction Synthesizer key in PHASE 0 deg b Press the set reference key on the counter that is press the set reference key of the statistics functions c On the test Multifunction Synthesizer key in the phase as indicated in the table The time interval on the counter display should be within the limits given in the table Time Interval Limits ns PHASE 1 deg PHASE 10 deg PHASE 100 deg Aa ALA T 100 000 279 2 2 776 4 2 779 2 10 000 2 792 27 764 27 792 1 000 27 920 277 640 277 920 100 279200 2776 400 2 779 200 Performance Test 8 4 29 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 9 CHANNEL TO CHANNEL PHASE ACCURACY OPTION 001 Specification Summation Option 001 Channel to Chamnel 0 1 deg or 30 ns equal signals summed into one output Phas
240. then the fi Tone Sequence softkey to access the Tone Sequence Mode ain Selection Level ps i MAIN E Tone Sequence Made Press NEXT LAST keys 4 Exit FREQ Seg Index i 212343672 9RBLOEFJ fi Manual AMPTD 149 pl f2 Continuous f2 Single f4 Stop Tone Number 9 Figure 3 1 How to Access The Tone Sequence Mode 3 4 Output a Sequence of Signals Enter the Tone 2 Press the NEXT key to access the Tone Configuration display Parameters This display allows you to specify the characteristics of the tones you wish to have in your sequence You can configure up to 16 different tones using the HP 8904A s 16 Tone Registers numbered 0 through E fi Tone Humber B FREE Hz Un Time 1 8 ms f4 Off Tim 1 Bms Configure Tone Register 0 3 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 kHz 4 Press the f4 UT Time softkey and enter 8 ms You have now set Tone 0 to be a 1 kHz signal with a period of 1 8 ms 1 ms on and 0 8 ms off Note that 1 ms is the default On Time and Off Time setting Note The entered tones will not appear at the output or on the oscilloscope until after you have selected a Run Mode as described later in this demonstration 1 ms 0 8 ms ON TIME OFF TIME Figure 3 2 Tone 0 Signal Output a Sequence of Signals 3 5 A A A AA A AAPP A HT A A Copy the Off Time 5 Press the blue SHIFT key and the f4 UT T ime softkey You have copied the displayed Off Time 0 8 ms to each
241. thin the limits shown NOTE If the measurements are slightly out of limits performing Adjustment 1 Output Gain and Offset may bring the instrument within specifications Performance Test 2 4 5 Performance Tests Amplitude Setting 10 V 5 01 V 5 V 2 5 V 1 25 V 625 mV 312 mV 156 2 mV 78 1 mV 39 0 mV 19 5 mV 10 0 mV 10 V 5 01 V 5 V 2 5 V 1 25 V 625 mV 312 mV 156 2 mV 78 1 mV 39 0 mV 19 5 mV 10 0 mV AC Amplitude Accuracy Output 1 9 794 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 224 Vdc 604 mVdc 291 mVdc 135 2 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 18 0 mVdc 1 5 mVdc 11 0 mVdc 10 21 Vdc 5 115 Vdc 5 105 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 646 mVdc 333 mVdc 177 2 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 60 0 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 31 0 mVdc Voltage Reading Limits 135 2 mVdc 10 21 Vdc 5 115 Vdc 5 105 Vdc 2 553 Vdc 1 276 Vdc 646 mVdc 333 mVdc 177 2 mVdc 99 1 mVdc 60 0 mVdc 40 5 mVdc 31 0 mVdc 9 794 Vdc 4 907 Vdc 4 897 Vdc 2 449 Vdc 1 224 Vdc 604 mVdc 291 mVdc 57 1 mVdc 18 0 mVdc 1 5 mVdc 11 0 mVdc Model 8904A 4 Onthe Multifunction Synthesizer key in AMPTD 8 V Set the oscilloscope s input impedance to 50 ohms or terminate the input in 50 ohms using a tee Set the oscilloscope s ve
242. ties Option 003 and rear panel outputs Option 004 Operating and reference information for other options is provided in the operating supplements at the end of section 3 This section of the manual describes the instruments documented by this manual it includes an instrument description options accessories specifications and other basic information The other sections contain the following information Section 2 Installation provides information about initial inspection preparation for use HP IB address selection for remote operation and storage and shipment Section 3 Operation provides information about panel features and includes operator s checks operating instructions for both local and remote operation and operator s maintenance information Operating information for options after Option 004 is provided in the form of separate supplements Section 4 Performance Tests provides the information required to check performance of the instrument against the critical specifications listed in table 1 1 Section 5 Adjustments provides the information required to properly adjust the instrument One copy of the operating information is supplied with the Multifunction Synthesizer An additional copy of the Operating Manual may be ordered separately through your nearest Hewlett Packard office Its part number is listed on the title page of this manual Also listed on the title page of this manual below the manual part number is
243. time The worst case misalignment should be within the limits indicated in the table NOTE Refer to the note following step 5b Reference Synthesizer Multifunction Synthesizer Misalignment Limits deg Frequency Hz Frequency Hz 1 000 000 100 000 500 000 50 000 200 000 20 000 10 000 1 000 1 000 100 Performance Test 7 4 25 Performance Tests Model 8904A Performance Test 8 PHASE ACCURACY USING A TIME INTERVAL COUNTER Specification MN IT T Phase sine wave Range 0 to 359 9 deg Accuracy 0 05 deg relative to O deg for a fixed frequency 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz Description The timebase reference of a reference multifunction synthesizer is slaved to the timebase reference of the test Multifunction Synthesizer The synthesizers are set to the same frequency and the outputs are connected to the start and stop inputs of a time interval counter For convenience the initial phase offset that is the time interval between the two signals is subtracted out by the time interval counter The phase of the test multifunction synthesizer is set to several offsets and the time interval measured to determine the actual phase shift NOTE Phase accuracy for Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 balanced output is not specified However if the instrument has Option 002 and 006 perform the portion of this test for Option 002 An alternate test for verifying phase accuracy is given in Performance Test 7 Phase Accuracy
244. tion you will sum the modulated Channel A signal with various other waveforms from Channels C and D If you have just completed the preceding demonstration How to Sum the Modulation Signals your HP 8904A is correctly configured for beginning this demonstration proceed to step 1 on the next page If your HP 8904A is not configured as shown in Table 2 3 please configure Channels A B and C as shown in the table before you begin this demonstration Table 2 3 Instrument Settings for Channels A B and C 2 17 Modulate or Sum the Signals 1 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and the 1 key You have Sum Channels and C configured the Channel C signal to be summed with the modulated Channel A signal 2 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V keys 3 Press the WAVEFORM key and then the 1 N L and TS 4 Press the key oe A 2 18 Modulate or Sum the Signals A A AA A A A a A A A A A A ee Ria A A A Sum Channel D 5 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel D Configuration with A and C display 6 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and the 1 key 7 Press the AMPTD key and enter 300 mV 8 Press the FREQ key and enter 10 kHz Adjust the oscilloscope if necessary to get a stable display Figure 2 5 shows how channels are summed when you select the same Output Port as the destination for each channel CHANNEL OUTPUT 1 Figure 2 5 The Waveforms from each Channel
245. ts are made on the A3 assembly with the balance transformer disconnected Equipment RT RE r ias pastas EA HP 3478A Thermal Converter usina HP 11050A or Ballentine Labs 1395A 1 The thermal converter is susceptible to burnout if more than 1 Vrms ts applied to its input Be careful when changing the frequency of the Multifunction Synthesizer that the amplitude does not inadvertently exceed 1 Vrms a displayed setting of 2 8 V on the Multifunction Synthesizer Procedure 1 Perform Adjustment 4 Sharp Cutoff Low Pass Filter first 2 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in t1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 OFF AMPTD 2 V 3 If the instrument has Option 006 balanced output disconnect the coax cable from A3J400 OUTPUT HIGH at the front edge of the A3 assembly In the steps that follows when a reference is made to the OUTPUTS 1 HIGH connector make the connection to A3J400 instead 4 Connect the ac input of the thermal converter to the Multifunction Synthesizer s OUTPUTS 1 HIGH output for the A3 Output Assembly or OUTPUTS 2 HIGH for the A10 Output Assembly Connect the de output of the thermal converter to the input of the voltmeter Refer to Figure 5 3 Adjustment 5 5 11 Adjustments Model 8904A HP 8904A MULTIFUNCTION SYNTHESIZER DIGITAL MULTIMETER OUTPUTS THERMAL 1 HIGH CONVERTER AC INPUT DC OUTPUT Figure 5 3 Sine X X Compensation Adjustment Test Setup
246. u want to output by selecting the appropriate Hop Ram Address using any of three methods e Direct front panel selection e Remote selection using the HP IB connector e Setting a binary address on the Digital Port Hop Register connections Operation Model 8904A A detailed example of using direct front panel controls to perform hopping is provided in the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Operation and Application guide This tutorial also has programming examples and HP IB code lists to allow you to perform hopping by remote control The use of the Digital Port to perform hopping is discussed later in Section 3 in the Digital Port information Operating Considerations Option 003 e Only channel A s parameters can be hopped e If your HP 8904A is equipped with four channels Option 001 channel A can be hopped while it is being modulated or summed with other signals except that the amplitude setting cannot be hopped when AM or DSB modulation is selected and the phase setting cannot be hopped when M is selected e Hop Mode can not be used in conjunction with any of the three Signal Sequence Modes provided by Option 001 Abbreviated Specifications Option 003 Supplemental Characteristics Switching Speed Via digital port Typically lt Bus lt 20us for full filter settling Via HP IB Typically lt 8 ms Mazimum switching rate via digital control port Approximately 400 kHz Mazimum allowable address skew via digital port
247. umber 100 120 220 240 Vac 3 0A 250V 2110 0003 Power Cables BEFORE CONNECTING THIS INSTRUMENT the protective earth terminal of the instrument must be connected to the protective conductor of the Mains power cord The Mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact The protective action must not be negated by the use of an extension cord power cable without a protective conductor grounding Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection This instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power receptacle this cable grounds the instrument cabinet The type of power cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Table 2 2 for the part numbers of the power cables and Mains plugs available ye rev O1JUL9 1 Model 8904A Installation Table 2 2 Power Cable and Mains Plug Part Numbers Plug raa Plug Gao Cable For Use Type diia Description real Color In Country Number inches 8120 1351 8120 1703 Mint Gray Mint Gray United Kingdom Cyprus Nigeria Rhodesia Singapore 90 STR BS1363A 90 90 0 0 9 0 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 250V e U L N G G 250V 250V 8120 1369 8120 0696 Gray Austrailia Gray New Zealand STR STR NZSS198 ASC112 STR 90 7 STR STR 2 STR 90
248. ument to Option 004 refer to the HP 8904A Service Manual s section 7 Option Conversions section for the necessary part numbers and procedure Note Options 005 and 006 may only be retrofit on instruments with serial prefiz 2948A and above See section 7 of the HP 8904A Service Manual for more information To add Option 005 multi instrument phase synchronization order HP part number 11827A from your local HP sales office This option is not compatable with Option 004 To add Option 006 balanced output order HP part number 11837A from your local HP sales office This option replaces the standard 500 output of Output 1 1 6 MECHANICAL AND DOCUMENT OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Rear Panel Outputs Option 004 The RF Output Connectors are located on the rear panel Option 004 can not be installed with either Option 005 Phase Synchronization or Option 006 High Power Balanced Output Extra Operating and Service Manuals 1 each Option 910 An additional Operation and Calibration Manual and Service Manual are provided Add Service Manual Option 915 The HP 8904A Service Manual provides the necessary procedures parts lists component locators troubleshooting aids and schematic diagrams to enable qualified service personnel to repair an instrument Information on retrofitting Options 002 and 004 is also glven Front Handle Kit Ease of handling is increased with the front panel handles Order HP part number 5061 9689 Bail Handle Ki
249. ure 5 5B Adjustment Locations for A2 Serial Prefix 2948A and above Model 8904A L11 SINE X X COMPENSATION R224 DAC LEVEL J6 J5 LOW OUTPUT HIGH OUTPUT pl a E E BD z T Wr i IH E vL EA a B M i uc o ar a j E gs T SHARP CUTOFF LPF L7 Figure 5 6 Adjustment Locations for A3 and A10 Adjustments TP402 FLT LO C425 HIGH FREQUENCY BALANCE R418 e T DC OFFSET2 o A m R229 DC OFFSET1
250. us Byte during HP IB control to perform a user defined operation that is dependant on the status of the instrument Table 3 8 HP 8904A Status Byte Definitions CET CI 7 128 Not Used RQS bit This bit signals the controller that an interrupt has been generated by one or more of the other status bits Reserved for future use Reverse Power Triggered Reverse Power Protection Circuit has been triggered Signalling Sequence Stopped Indicates that a DTMF Tone or Digital sequence has ended Used with Opt 001 only Signalling Sequence Started Indicates that a DTMF Tone or Digital sequence has started Used with Opt 001 only Timebase Out of Lock The reference oscillator loop on the digital A2 assembly is out of lock invalid HP IB Command An invalid code has been received on the bus or an error has been made in programming the instrument Using the Status Byte Each of the 8 bits has an equivalent numeric weighting associated with it This numeric value is used to indicate when a bit has been set to a high condition It is this weighting that is used to read from and write to the Service Mask Service Mask The Service Mask determines what bits in the Status Byte are used to initiate a service request interrupt SRQ It masks the interrupts that you don t want to be active and enables the interrupt s that you do want active You can both read the Service Mask to view the current settings and write to t
251. us mode Available only with Option 005 Phase Synchronization See section 3A for additional information Special 7 Configure as Master Controller Available only with Option 005 Phase Synchronization See section 3A for additional information 3 38 rev 01NOV89 Model 8904A Operation 3 10 OPERATING TECHNICAL REFERENCE Waveform Jitter The HP 8904A generates waveforms through a sampled digital process The output clock frequency for the digital to analog conversion process is approximately 1 67 MHz By Nyquist s theorem we can conclude that the maximum possible frequency for the HP 8904A would be 22 2 800 kHz Because it is impossible to build an analog filter which has infinite cutoff slope the maximum frequency is limited to 600 kHz to accomodate a realizable filter Sinewaves produced by this process will have excellent time stability however square ramp and triangle waveforms will have Jitter The value of this jitter will be one clock cycle of the DAC eri 600 ns for square and triangle waveforms This value doubles to 1200 ns when using ramp waveforms due to the fact that there is only one fast transition per cycle of this non symmetrical waveform Jitter occurs when the frequency of these waveforms is not harmonically related to the DAC clock frequency which is exactly 27 or 1 677 721 6 Hz For example if we choose a frequency of 24 5 kHz this frequency divided into the clock yields a non integer r
252. ut page is designed to be viewed as you refer to the other material that is listed earlier in the section letting you see a before and after relationship between the menus and the related operations rev 01NOV89 3 1 Operation Model 8904A 3 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM The block diagram below illustrates the main functional blocks that comprise the HP 8904A The capabilities of your instrument are dependant upon the options you have ordered By understanding how the different options integrate with the rest of the instrument you can quickly learn to create almost any signal you need For more information on the capabilities and operation of standard and optional instrument functions refer to the detailed information following later in Section 3 Step by step operations for each option are included in the HP 8904A Multifunction Synthesizer Basic Operation and Application guide HOP RAM 16 REGISTERS Figure 3 1 HP 8904A Functional Blocks 3 2 Model 8904A Operation Functional Block Descriptions CPU The Central Processing Unit consists of the microprocessor Numeric Synthesis 1C and the associated ROM and RAM memories needed to store the instruments operating system and configuration settings Interfacing between the HP IB Digital Port and keyboard inputs is performed here Recall Save Registers This is a special section of RAM that is used to store instrument settings for later retrieval A battery backup is provided so t
253. utput base SEQE 25 ET or SEQE 3000 ET Trigger sequence to run continuously RUNC Trigger sequence to run burst RUNS Run sequence manually RUNM Stop sequence STOP Set binary edit base BSB Set octal edit base BSO Set hexadecimal edit base BSH Set binary output base OBB Set hexadecimal output base OBH Output base readback ROB Set binary edit base BSB Set binary edit base BSB 3C 6 HP 8904A Option 001 Enhancements Programming Example 10 Hpib 726 20 OUTPUT Hpib GM4 30 OUTPUT Hpib HRA 0 ET 40 OUTPUT Hpib APH 5 VL 50 OUTPUT Hpib HRA 1 ET 60 OUTPUT Hpib APH 2 VL 70 OUTPUT Hpib BSH OBB 80 OUTPUT Hpib RWF DC 90 OUTPUT Hpib BL 4 ET 100 OUTPUT Hpib SEQP 1 ET 110 OUTPUT Hpib WSQ1B49AE92BFB4B6BE3A9CD780 120 130 140 OUTPUT Hpib SEQP 251 ET 150 OUTPUT Hpib WSQ09A8D7E8CB56355673EACD32 160 OUTPUT Hpib SEQP 501 ET 170 OUTPUT Hpib WSQ382E68AD7C9FB9A4129BF54C 180 OUTPUT Hpib RFQ 600 Hz 190 OUTPUT Hpib RUNS 200 END Go to HOP RAM SEQUENCE MODE Set HOP RAM address to 0 Set amplitude for address 0 to 5 volts Set HOP RAM address to 1 Set amplitude for address 1 to 2 volts Set EDIT BASE to hex OUTPUT BASE to bin Set waveform to be hopped to DC Set burst length to 4 Set sequence pointer to
254. while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted re sult in personal injury Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been dis connected from its source of supply For continued protection against fire hazard replace the line fuse s only with 250V fuse s of the same current rating and type for exam ple normal blow time delay etc Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders ATTENTION Static Sensitive Devices This instrument was constructed in an ESD electro static dis charge protected environment This is because most of the semi conductor devices used in this instrument are susceptible to damage by static discharge Depending on the magnitude of the charge device substrates can be punctured or destroyed by contact or mere proximity of a static charge The results can cause degradation of device performance early failure or immediate destruction These charges are generated in numerous ways such as simple con tact separation of materials and normal motions of persons working with static sensitive devices When handling or servicing equipment containing static sensitive devices adequate precautions must be taken to prevent device dam age or destruction Only those who are thoroughly familiar with industry accepted techniques for handling static sensitive devices should attempt to service circuitry with these devic
255. wo or three channels may be summed for modulation of channel A Tone Sequence Mode Sixteen user defined frequencies can be programmed into sequences Both the on and off times of each tone can be adjusted Dua Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Sequence Mode The 16 standard Bell Telephone touch tone signals commonly used in communications signaling can be output Both the on and off times of each tone can be user defined Digital Sequence Mode Digital data strings can be used in sequences to provide a series of signaling events Bit period and on off levels can be user defined Note Hop RAM Sequence Mode and EM Stereo Composite Generator functions are only available in Option 001 instruments with serial prefixes 2948A and above Detailed operating information for these functions is provided in section 3C Hop RAM Sequence Mode Up to 16 different frequency amplitude and phase settings can be preset Sequences of up to 750 tones can be built using all 16 states Sequences of up to 3000 tones can be built using only two states Sequences can be output from 1 to 127 times using a burst function Timing is provided internally for the sequences and is adjustable for precise baud rates FM Stereo Composite Generator A flexible FM stereo encoder function is added for testing broadcast receivers The audio test tone frequency composite signal level test signal mode pilot on off pilot amplitude pilot frequency pilot phase carrier frequency
256. wo voltages NOTE This test verifies the spectral purity of Output 1 in instruments with Option 006 If the instrument has Option 002 a second output also perform Performance Test 5 Equipment Audio Analyze sii Aa HP 8903B Feedthrough Termination GOULI see e orar HP 11095A Adapter BNC to Dual Banana Plug 2 required e HP 1251 2277 Procedure 1 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in f1 Channel Config NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 1 ON AMPTD 10 V 2 Connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 1 HIGH and LOW outputs to the audio analyzer s floating inputs through a 6002 feedthrough termination Use two BNC to dual banana plug adapters and two BNC to single banana plug adapters supplied with the Multifunction Synthesizer as necessary to maintain a floating output The HP 8903B will also require two BNC to single banana plug adapters 4 20 Performance Test 6 Model 8904A Performance Tests 3 Set the audio analyzer to measure distortion in dB On the Multifunction Synthesizer set the Analyzer Low Pass 300 10 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 30 300 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 20 7 500 7 500 20 000 20 000 100 000 Multifunction Synthesizer Settings Distortion Limits dB 1 On an HP 89038 a 750 kHz low pass filter is selected when the other low pass filters are off Performance Test 6 amplitude and frequency as listed in the follow
257. y With the HP 8904A setting up your output amplitude is as easy as pressing the AMPTD key and entering the value you desire 0 to 10V Note The amplitude level shown in the HP 8904A s display reflects the output signal level in peak volts when it is terminated by a high impedance input gt 50 KQ and peak to peak volts when it is terminated by a 50 Q input Throughout this demonstration the oscilloscope is assumed to have a high impedance input a High Impedance Termination b 502 Termination Figure 1 3 Output Amplitude provided by the HP 8904A when set at 1V 1 10 Meet the HP 8904A A A A AA AA A A A A A a a Select a Waveform Selecting any one of the HP 8904A s six waveforms is just as easy 6 Press the WAVEFORM key You can now select any one of the HP 8904A s six waveforms Note that the sine waveform is the HP 8904A s default selection 7 Press the 1 ramp key the N triangle key the L square key the NOISE key and then the dc key to output each of the five additional waveforms 8 Now press the L key to select the square wave output Meet the HP 8904A 1 11 A A A A I EN DIED Now Vary the Phase The HP 8904A allows you to vary the phase of your waveforms from 0 degrees to 359 9 degrees in step sizes specified by you 9 Set the oscilloscope to trigger on the line voltage You may need to adjust the oscilloscope s triggering in order to get a stable display RR
258. y the DESTN key and the AM key to configure Channel C to amplitude modulate Channel A 2 Press the AMPTD key and enter 10 Channel A is now being 100 amplitude modulated by Channels B 90 and C 10 Note The HP 8904A allows a maximum setting of 100 AM between the combined channels For example with Channel B set at 90 AM Channel C can only be set at lt 10 AM 3 Press the PHASE key the 0 key and then the deg key to set the phase to 0 0 degrees Note that your frequency and phase settings did not change when you changed the modulation mode Only the amplitude setting changes when you change the destination entry S mra Modulate or Sum the Signals 2 15 AA SES AA a a A Pe A O eee 4 Press the WAVEFORM key and the NOISE key You have now configured Channel C to add a 10 noise component to the Channel B modulation signal Remember Whenever you select the same modulation modes for two or more channels these channels are summed and the resulting signal is used to modulate Channel A Figure 2 4 shows the modulation signal summation capability provided by the HP 8904A CHANNEL B OUTPUT 1 Figure 2 4 The Modulation Signals are first Summed and then used to Modulate Channel A whenever the same Modulation Mode is Selected 2 16 Modulate or Sum the Signals How to Sum the Output Signals Note Another possibility offered by the HP 8904A is to sum the output signals In this demonstra
259. y the DESTN key and then the AM key 6 Press the AMPTD key and enter 100 Channel B is now configured to amplitude modulate Channel A Adjust the oscilloscope if necessary to get a stable display 4 10 Output Two Signals at Once A A A A A AA A A A A A A A A A A A A cl A ee ae a Sum at Output Port 2 Channel C 7 Press the NEXT key twice to access the Channel C Configuration display 8 Press the FREQ key and enter 20 kHz 9 Press the WAVEFORM key and the UL key 10 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and then the 2 key to route Channel C to Output Port 2 11 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V Channel D 12 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel D Configuration display 13 Press the blue SHIFT key the DESTN key and then the 2 key to route Channel D to Output Port 2 14 Press the AMPTD key and enter 1V The HP 8904A is now configured to sum Channels C and D and output the resulting waveform at Output Port 2 BUESA O ENE OR ON AA MEE NG E IO A ASA ENRERE I U IT T UE VIT I Hinai T H SSi ITTI NLL HU TA a Tata ie A mee SO we Figure 4 3 Two 20 kHz Square Wave Signals One Modulated by 1 kHz top and the Other Summed with 1 kHz bottom Output Two Signals at Once 4 11 A A A A A A A a A A A EEN Table 4 4 shows the parameters you have entered for each channel Instruments that have four channels and Dual Output Ports provide maximum flexibility for meeting the needs
260. y Configuration Option 03 If your HP 8904A is equipped with Option 03 this Hop Mode demonstration will teach you how to e Access Hop Mode Operation e Configure Channel A for Hopping its Frequency Amplitude and Phase Settings e Fast Hop Channel A Connect your HP 8904A to the oscilloscope as shown above TTT 5 2 Hop the Output Signal P A A A A A A A A A A A A ee Ae e se Adjust Your Oscilloscope DIS DAY oca ad de Channel A VOUS DIVISION lt a 1V s iia ts de High Impedance Time DIVISION rs cid 0 2 ms o EaR E EEE A E TE EEE Channel A Select Chassis Ground 1 Press the blue SHIFT key and the PRESET key Len ee 2 Press the blue SHIFT key and then the FLOAT key SEE 3 Press the 1 key and then the OFF key to reference the HP 8904A s circuit ground to chassis ground at Output 1 Note that the FLOAT LED for Output 1 is now off 4 Adjust the oscilloscope trace if necessary to position the trace at center scale Hop the Output Signal 5 3 How to Access Hop Mode Operation 1 Press the f1 Channel Contig softkey to access the Channel Configuration Mode 2 Press the NEXT key to access the Channel A Configuration display The HP 8904A will output Channel A when the Hop Mode is turned on The HP 8904A will allow you to hop the frequency amplitude and or phase settings of the Channel A signal 140 pu DESTH Outi ch A FREG 1008 8 Hz AMPTD 3 0 deg WORM Sine PHASE HP 984A Main
261. ynthesizer Multifunction Synthesizer isalignment Limits deg Frequency Hz Frequency Hz upper 1 000 000 100 000 500 000 50 000 200 000 20 000 l 10 000 1000 1 000 100 NOTE Phase accuracy can be measured at lower frequencies down to the specified 0 1 Hz if the oscilloscope has storage capabilities At lower frequencies the drift in the oscilloscope s vertical amplifiers may become significant This concludes the test if the instrument does not have Option 002 4 24 Performance Test 7 Model 8904A Performance Tests Output 2 6 Set up the equipment as in step 1 except connect the Multifunction Synthesizer OUTPUTS 2 HIGH output to the oscilloscope s de coupled X input Refer to Figure 4 3 7 On the Multifunction Synthesizer press SHIFT PRESET After the instrument presets key in fi Channel Config NEXT NEXT SHIFT FLOAT 2 OFF FREQ 100 kHz AMPTD 1 V PHASE INCR SET 18 deg 8 Set the reference synthesizer s frequency to exactly 1 MHz The amplitude remains at 0 7 Vrms 9 Set the frequency of the two synthesizers as indicated in the following table as was done in step 5 For each setting perform the following steps a Adjust the phase of the reference synthesizer until the front and back traces of the Lissajous pattern coincide b On the Multifunction Synthesizer press PHASE then press the ft key 19 times and observe the alignment of the waves of the resulting Lissajous pattern each

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

8904A 8904 aesch 8904 ardning 8904 ayrshire avenue louisville ky 8904 aesch zh 8904 art 54 8904 avantia 8904 area code 8904 armstrong lane 8904 ayrshire avenue 8904 arley dr springfield va 22153 89044 zip code 89048 zip code 8904 codice tributo 8904 codice tributo cos\u0027e

Related Contents

Smeg FR298SENF Owner's Manual  Manual de Utilização - Hanna Instruments Portugal  取扱説明書 保証書付  Manual de instruções Selecção do idioma unidade de  Bertazzoni H48 6G MFE VI cooker    impactos ambientais do refino de petróleo  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file